You are on page 1of 153

Operating Instructions

AMG 3

- Genset Control -

Version 1.0xxx

® All rights reserved. Subject to technical modifications.


Version g3/leo.3501.b/e
2001-09-24
AMG 3 Bedienungsanleitung Englisch g3leo-3501-be.doc

Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH
Handwerkstraße 29
70565 Stuttgart

Phone: (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Fax: (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-1 00
eMail: info@leonhard-reglerbau.de
Table of Contents Page

1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1 Safety Notes for the User ................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Connection of the Device................................................................................................................................................. 6
1.2.1 Power Supply............................................................................................................................................................ 6
1.2.2 Measuring Inputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.3 Auxiliary and Control Outputs ................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.4 Auxiliary and Control Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 12
1.2.5 Governor Outputs (Standard / Options Qf/Qu) ....................................................................................................... 13
1.2.6 Interface (Options Su/Sb/Sf)................................................................................................................................... 14
2 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 15
2.1 What to consider when using ........................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.1 ... the different options ............................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.2 ... equipments with one power circuit breaker ........................................................................................................ 15
2.1.3 ... equipments with asynchronous generators ........................................................................................................ 15
2.2 Table of Setpoints.......................................................................................................................................................... 16
2.3 Control Inputs ................................................................................................................................................................ 16
2.4 Control Outputs.............................................................................................................................................................. 18
2.5 Clear Text Display ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.5.1 Functional Messages of the Device on the Display ................................................................................................ 19
2.5.2 Functional Messages of the Device on the Display ................................................................................................ 20
2.6 Description Start-/Stop Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 22
2.6.1 Diesel Unit .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
2.6.2 Gas Engine............................................................................................................................................................. 24
2.7 Operation of the Power Circuit Breakers ....................................................................................................................... 26
2.7.1 Synchronization of the Generator Power Circuit Breakers ..................................................................................... 26
2.7.2 Close Generator Power Circuit Breaker without Synchronization (Black Start GCB) ............................................. 27
2.7.3 Synchronization of the Mains Circuit Breakers ....................................................................................................... 28
2.7.4 Close Mains Circuit Breaker without Synchronization (Black Start MCB)............................................................... 28
2.7.5 Opening the Generator Power Circuit Breaker ....................................................................................................... 29
2.7.6 Opening the Mains Circuit Breaker......................................................................................................................... 29
2.8 Control of the Power Circuit Breakers ........................................................................................................................... 30
2.9 Monitoring of the Power Circuit Breaker ........................................................................................................................ 31
2.9.1 Add-on Time Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................... 31
2.9.2 Circuit Breaker Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 31
2.10 Switch Logic of the Power Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................. 31
2.10.1 Switch Logic "PARALLEL" [NxPB]........................................................................................................................ 31
2.10.2 Switch Logic "INTERCHANGE" [N2PB] ............................................................................................................... 32
2.10.3 Switch Logic "CLOSED TRANS." ......................................................................................................................... 32
2.10.4 Switch Logic "CLOSED TRANS." [N2PB/NEB] .................................................................................................... 33
2.10.5 Switch Logic "EXTERNAL" ................................................................................................................................... 33
2.11 Emergency Power Operation [N2PB/NEB] .................................................................................................................. 33
2.11.1 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "PARALLEL" [N2PB] ................................................................... 34
2.11.2 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "OPEN TRANS." [N2PB/NEB]..................................................... 34
2.11.3 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "CLOSED TRANS." [N2PB/NEB] ................................................ 35
2.11.4 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "INTERCHANGE" [N2PB] ........................................................... 35
2.11.5 Emergency Power with "EXTERNAL" Switch Logic ............................................................................................. 35
2.11.6 Emergency Power with Mains Power Circuit Breaker Malfunction ....................................................................... 35
2.12 Sprinkler Operation...................................................................................................................................................... 36
2.13 Direction of Power ....................................................................................................................................................... 37
2.14 Load and/or var Sharing [NxPB] .................................................................................................................................. 38
2.14.1 Schematic Representation of the Load Sharing via the CAN-bus ........................................................................ 39
2.15 Connection of External Components ........................................................................................................................... 40
2.15.1 Speed Governor SG 2/SG 2D .............................................................................................................................. 40
2.16 Error............................................................................................................................................................................. 41
2.16.1 Error Classes ........................................................................................................................................................ 41
2.16.2 Internally Detected Errors ..................................................................................................................................... 41
2.16.3 Acknowledge Error ............................................................................................................................................... 42
3 DISPLAY AND OPERATION COMPONENTS .................................................................................................. 44
3.1 Front Membrane ............................................................................................................................................................ 44
3.1.1 Brief Description of the Light-Emitting Diodes and Buttons .................................................................................... 45
3.1.2 Overview of the Functions of the Buttonn............................................................................................................... 45
3.2 Light-Emitting Diodes..................................................................................................................................................... 46
3.3 Button ............................................................................................................................................................................ 47
3.3.1 Display Touch ......................................................................................................................................................... 47
3.3.2 Operation of the Power Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................ 48
3.3.3 Selector Switch for Operating Modes ..................................................................................................................... 49
3.4 Display ........................................................................................................................................................................... 50

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 2/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4 PARAMETERIZATION MASKS (INPUT OF PARAMETERS).......................................................................... 51
4.1 Service Display .............................................................................................................................................................. 51
4.1.1 Service Display for the Version Without Voltage Transducer (400 V) .................................................................... 51
4.1.2 Service Display for the Version with a Voltage Transducer (100 V) ....................................................................... 52
4.1.3 Status of the Circuit Breakers and Relays during Synchronization......................................................................... 52
4.2 Configuration of the Password Protection ..................................................................................................................... 52
4.3 Configuration of the Basic Settings................................................................................................................................ 53
4.3.1 Parameterization via the Side Connector (Direct Parameterization) ...................................................................... 54
4.3.2 Generator- and Network Configuration................................................................................................................... 55
4.3.3 Transformer and Measuring Quantities .................................................................................................................. 56
4.3.4 Mains Current-/Mains Power Measurement ........................................................................................................... 56
4.3.5 Changing Passwords.............................................................................................................................................. 58
4.4 Controller Configuration................................................................................................................................................. 58
4.4.1 Voltage Stabilizer and Import/Export Power Control [NxPB] .................................................................................. 59
4.4.2 Frequency Controller .............................................................................................................................................. 60
4.4.3 Voltage controller.................................................................................................................................................... 63
4.4.4 Power Factor Controller [NxPB].............................................................................................................................. 64
4.4.5 Active Load Controller [NxPB] ................................................................................................................................ 65
4.4.6 Load and/or var sharing (options W/O)................................................................................................................... 68
4.5 Configuration of the Load Management [NxPB] ............................................................................................................ 69
4.5.1 Load-dependent Start/Stop in Operation in Parallel with the Mains ....................................................................... 69
4.5.2 Temperature Dependent Start/Stop (Option Tz)..................................................................................................... 75
4.5.3 Remote Control via Interface (Option Sb/Sf) .......................................................................................................... 76
4.6 Configuration of the Circuit Breakers............................................................................................................................. 76
4.6.1 Circuit Breaker Logic .............................................................................................................................................. 77
4.6.2 Switch Logic GCB................................................................................................................................................... 79
4.6.3 Synchronization (Only for Synchronous Generators) ............................................................................................. 79
4.6.4 Synchronizing Time Monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 80
4.6.5 Black Start (Only for Synchronous Generators) ..................................................................................................... 81
4.6.6 Add-on Function (Only for Asynchronous Generators)........................................................................................... 81
4.6.7 Add-on Time Monitoring (Only for Asynchronous Generators)............................................................................... 82
4.6.8 Monitoring of the Circuit Breaker (Switch Impulses) ............................................................................................... 82
4.6.9 Mains Decoupling [N2PB]....................................................................................................................................... 83
4.6.10 Mains Settling Time for Asynchronous Generators .............................................................................................. 83
4.7 Configuration of the Emergency Power Operation [N2PB/NEB].................................................................................... 84
4.8 Configuration of the Monitors......................................................................................................................................... 85
4.8.1 Monitoring of the Generator Performance .............................................................................................................. 85
4.8.2 Mains Power Monitoring [NxPB] ............................................................................................................................. 86
4.8.3 Generator Overload Monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 86
4.8.4 Generator Reverse power /Reduced Power Protection.......................................................................................... 87
4.8.5 Load Imbalance Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 88
4.8.6 Generator Overcurrent Monitoring.......................................................................................................................... 89
4.8.7 Generator Frequency Monitoring............................................................................................................................ 90
4.8.8 Generator Voltage Monitoring................................................................................................................................. 91
4.8.9 Mains Frequency Monitoring .................................................................................................................................. 92
4.8.10 Generator Voltage Monitoring............................................................................................................................... 93
4.8.11 Phase Shift Monitoring.......................................................................................................................................... 94
4.8.12 Battery Voltage Monitoring ................................................................................................................................... 95
4.9 Configuration of Digital Inputs........................................................................................................................................ 95
4.9.1 Setting of the Digital Inputs..................................................................................................................................... 96
4.9.2 Denomination of the Digital Inputs.......................................................................................................................... 97
4.9.3 Setting the Function of Terminal 6.......................................................................................................................... 98
4.10 Configuration of the Analog Inputs (Option T4) ........................................................................................................... 99
4.10.1 Setting of the Analog Inputs.................................................................................................................................. 99
4.10.2 Monitoring of the Measuring Range (Option T4) ................................................................................................ 107
4.10.3 Time Lag of the Analog Inputs via the Engine Speed......................................................................................... 107
4.11 Configuration of the Outputs...................................................................................................................................... 108
4.11.1 Analog Outputs (Option A2)................................................................................................................................ 108
4.11.2 Relay Manager ................................................................................................................................................... 109
4.11.3 Programming of the Relay Outputs .................................................................................................................... 109
4.12 Configuration of the Engine ....................................................................................................................................... 110
4.12.1 Auxiliary Operations............................................................................................................................................ 110
4.12.2 Determination of the Engine Type ...................................................................................................................... 110
4.12.3 Coasting, Delayed Engine Monitoring and Ignition Speed ................................................................................. 112
4.12.4 Pickup/Dynamo/Tachogenerator ........................................................................................................................ 115
4.13 Counter Configuration................................................................................................................................................ 115
4.13.1 Maintenance Call ................................................................................................................................................ 116
4.13.2 Operating Hours Counter.................................................................................................................................... 116
4.13.3 Start Counter ...................................................................................................................................................... 117
4.13.4 kWh-Counter ...................................................................................................................................................... 117
4.13.5 Current Slave Pointer ......................................................................................................................................... 117

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 3/153
5 COMMISSION ................................................................................................................... ............................... 118
6 ANNEX ........................................................................................................................ ..................................... 120
6.1 Analog Output Manager (List of Parameters with Explanations) (Option A2).............................................................. 120
6.2 Relay Manager (List of Parameters with Explanations) ............................................................................................... 122
6.3 Interface (Options Su/Sb/Sf)........................................................................................................................................ 124
6.3.1 Transmitting Telegram (Option Su/Sb) ................................................................................................................. 124
6.3.2 Receiving Telegram (Option Sb) .......................................................................................................................... 128
6.3.3 Remote Monitoring and Control via Gateway GW 4 (Option Sf)........................................................................... 129
6.3.4 Comments (on Interface) ...................................................................................................................................... 136
6.4 Measured Quantities and Technical Data.................................................................................................................... 138
6.4.1 Measured Quantities............................................................................................................................................. 138
6.4.2 Technical Data...................................................................................................................................................... 139
6.5 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................................................. 140
6.6 Wiring Diagram ............................................................................................................................................................ 141
6.6.1 Version NEB ......................................................................................................................................................... 141
6.6.2 Version N1PB ....................................................................................................................................................... 142
6.6.3 Version N2PB ....................................................................................................................................................... 143
7 LIST OF PARAMETERS.................................................................................................................................. 144
8 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................... 153

NOTE

With the exception of the following differences, the versions described in this operating manual are
completely identical:
[NEB] Genset controller to be operated with two power circuit breakers
without the option to run the equipment in parallel with the system,
without power regulation and without power distribution.
[N1PB] Genset controller to be operated with one circuit breaker,
including the option to run the equipment in parallel with system.
[N1PB] Genset controller to be operated with two circuit breakers,
including the option to run the equipment in parallel with the system.
[NxPB] Note
Many of these functions are only available in versions [N1PB] or [N2PB]. This
option is pointed out by [NxPB], with the possibility of x = 1/2.

NOTE

These Operating Instructions have been developed and are intended for a unit fitted with all
available options. Inputs/outputs, functions, parameterization screens and other details described,
which do not exist on your unit may be ignored.

ATTENTION

The present Operating Instructions have been prepared to enable the installation and
commissioning of the device. On account of the large variety of parameter settings, it is not possible
to cover every possible combination. The Operating Instructions are therefore only a guide. In case
of incorrect entries or a total loss of functions, the default settings can be taken from the enclosed
list of parameters.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 4/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
1 Introduction

1.1 Safety Note s for the User


This documentation contains the relevant information for the normal use of the prod-
uct described herein. It is intended to be read by qualified staff.

Danger notes The following notes are intended to guarantee your own personal safety as well as to
protect the device and other units connected to it against damages. Safety notes and
warnings intended to prevent any danger to the life and health of users or mainte-
nance personnel and to avoid any damage will be identified in this documentation by
means of the symbols and terms listed below. Within the framework of this docu-
mentation, the signals and terms which are used have the following meaning:

DANGER !!!

The DANGER symbol draws your attention to dangers while the description indicates how to handle
and/or avoid such hazards. Any non-observance may cause fatal or serious injuries as well as
considerable damage to property.

WARNING !

If the warnings are not observed, the unit and any devices attached to it may be destroyed. Please
take into account appropriate precautions.

ATTENTION

This symbol points to important notes concerning the mounting, installation, and connection of the
unit. These note should absolutely be observed when connecting the unit.

NOTE

References to other notes and supplements as well as tables and lists are identified by means of
the "I" symbol. Most of the referenced sections are included in the Annex.

Intended use This device may only be used for the applications described in this operating manual.
The prerequisite for a proper and safe operation of the product is correct transporta-
tion, storage, and installation as well as careful operation and maintenance.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 5/153
1.2 Connection of the Device

WARNING !

A circuit breaker must be provided near to the device and in a position easily accessible to the
operator. This must also bear a sign identifying it as an isolating switch for the unit.

NOTE

Inductivities connected (such as coils of operating current or undervoltage tripping devices, or


auxiliary or power contacts) must be connected to a suitable interference suppressor.

1.2.1 Power Supp ly


8 ..36 V D C D 1 = P 600M
fo r 12 V D C syste m s C 1 = 47.000 uF / 40 V
0V

2
C1 P o w er supply
8..36 V DC

1
8 ..3 6 V D C (in n o rm a l op e ra tio n)
D1 (m in . 1 2 V D C to start)
N

0
Terminal Description Amax
0 Neutral point of the three-phase system or neutral terminal of the Solder
voltage transformer (Measuring reference point) lug
1 8..36 V DC, 8 W 2.5 mm²
2 0 V reference point 2.5 mm²

Note: On use in a 12 V DC system, please wire the power supply as described above.

1.2.2 Measuring I nputs


a.) Voltage Measuring Inputs

• Generator
MCB GCB
L1
L2
L3
G
N
0 20 21 22

L3
L2
G enerator voltage
L1
N

Terminal Measurement Description Amax


20 400 V direct or Generator voltage L1 2.5 mm²
21 via../100 V Generator voltage L2 2.5 mm²
22 measurement Generator voltage L3 2.5 mm²
0 transducer Neutral point of the 3-phase system/transformer Solder lug

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 6/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
• Bus bar/remanence
MCB GCB
L1
L2
L3
G
N

A synchronous

23 24
L2
R em anence voltage
L1

S ynchronous

23 24
L2
B usbar voltage
L1

Terminal Measurement Description Amax


Asynchronous version
23 Remanence voltage L1 2.5 mm²
direct
24 Remanence voltage L2 2.5 mm²
Synchronous version
23 400 V direct Busbar voltage L1 2.5 mm²
24 or../100 V Busbar voltage L2 2.5 mm²

• Mains
MCB GCB
L1
L2
L3
G
N

50 51 52
L3
L2 M ains voltage
L1

Terminal Measurement Description Amax


50 400 V direct or Mains voltage L1 2.5 mm²
51 via../100 V Mains voltage L2 2.5 mm²
52 measurement Mains voltage L3 2.5 mm²
0 transducer Neutral point of the 3-phase system / transformer Solder lug

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 7/153
b.) Current Measuring Inputs

WARNING !

Before deconnecting the secondary current transformer connections or the connections of the
current transformer at the device, make usre that the current transformer is short-circuited.

• Generator
MCB GCB
L1
L2
L3
G
N

0 20 21 22
L3
L2
G enerator voltage
L1
N

Terminal Measurement Description Amax


25 Generator current L1, transformer terminal s2 (l) 2.5 mm²
26 Transformer Generator current L1, transformer terminal s1 (k) 2.5 mm²
29 ../1 A Generator current L2, transformer terminal s2 (l) 2.5 mm²
30 or Generator current L2, transformer terminal s1 (k) 2.5 mm²
31 ../5 A Generator current L3, transformer terminal s2 (l) 2.5 mm²
32 Generator current L3, transformer terminal s1 (k) 2.5 mm²

• Mains [NxPB] Standard (Mains current measurement via current transformer)

S2 S1
MCB GCB
L1
s2 s1
L2
L3
G
N

27 28 s1 (k)
L1
M a ins current
s2 (l) ../1 A or ../5 A

Terminal Measurement Description Amax


27 Transformer Mains current L1, transformer terminal s2 (l) 2.5 mm²
28 ../1 A../5 A Mains current L1, transformer terminal s1 (k) 2.5 mm²

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 8/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Option In20 (Power measurement via measurement transducer)

NOTE

If several units are connected to form an interconnection, the 20 mA measuring signal must not be
looped through all units. At each control, a 0/4..20 mA buffer amplifier must be connected to the
mains power input (terminals 27/28). When selecting the external measuring transformer, please
note that this has to transmit negative ranges on transmission of supply and reference power.

MCB GCB
L1
L2
L3
G
N

M e a su rin g tra nsd u cer

27 28
M a ins active pow er
+ 0/4..20 m A

Terminal Measurement Description Amax


27 Analog signal Mains active load via a 0/4..20 mA-signal of an 2.5 mm²
28 0 /4.. 20 mA external measuring transducer (z. B. UMT 1) 2.5 mm²

1.2.3 Auxiliary and Control Outputs


a.) Digital Inputs
• Control inputs
4..40 V D C

S ignal device
3

A utom atic 1
7

S ignal device
5

A utom atic 2
7

S ignal device
Sprinkler operation / engine release
6

or external acknowledgm ent


7

R eply G C B CB 3
4

R eply: G C B is open
7

S ignal device
7 53

R elease M C B
R eply M C B CB 3
7 54

R eply: M C B is open

Terminal Zugehöriger Description Amax


Common (according to DIN 40 719 Part 3, 5.8.3)
make
contact
3 Automatic 1 2.5 mm²
5 Automatic 2 2.5 mm²
7 Multifunction: sprinkler op. / engine release / ext.
6 2.5 mm²
acknowledgement / engine stop / start without CB
53 Release MCB (mains power circuit breaker) 2.5 mm²
Break
contact
4 Reply: Generator power circuit breaker is open 2.5 mm²
7 Reply: Mains power circuit breaker is open or
54 2.5 mm²
mains parallel status (in units with 1 CB)

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 9/153
The digital inputs may be either connected in a positive or a negative logic circuit:

Positive logic circuit The digital input is connected with +24 V DC.
Negative logic circuit The digital input is connected with GND.

• Alarm inputs (positive logic)


4..40 V D C
S ignal device

A
D igital input

B
Terminal Associated Description Amax
common (according to DIN 40 719 Part 3, 5.8.3)
A B make contact
61 Digital input 1 (for sprinkler op. = EMERG. STOP) 2.5 mm²
62 Digital input 2 2.5 mm²
63 Digital input 3 2.5 mm²
64 Digital input 4 2.5 mm²
65 Digital input 5 2.5 mm²
66 Digital input 6 2.5 mm²
67 Digital input 7 2.5 mm²
60
68 Digital input 8 2.5 mm²
69 Digital input 9 2.5 mm²
70 digital input A 2.5 mm²
71 digital input B 2.5 mm²
72 digital input C 2.5 mm²
73 digital input D 2.5 mm²
74 digital input E 2.5 mm²

Example for negative logic


4..40 V D C

A
D igital input
B

S ignal device

Associated Terminal Description Amax


common (according to DIN 40 719 Part 3, 5.8.3)
A B make contact
61 Digital input 1 (for sprinkler op. = EMERG. STOP) 2.5 mm²
60 62 Digital input 2 2.5 mm²
63 Digital input 3 2.5 mm²

b.) Analog Inputs (Option T4)


A

A nalog input
B

P t100 or P t1000
o n ly a t P t10 0
C

Ia
A

A nalog input
GND
B

0/4..20 m A
C

Ua
A

A nalog input
GND
B

0..5 V , 0..10 V , 0..150 m V


C
A

A nalog input
NTC, PTC, VDO
B

0..180/380 O hm
C

Terminal Description Amax


A B C
93 94 95 Analog input 1 1.5 mm²
96 97 98 Analog input 2 1.5 mm²
99 100 101 Analog input 3 1.5 mm²
102 103 104 Analog input 4 1.5 mm²

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 10/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
c.) Pickup Input

92 91 90
s w ./in d.
24 V P icku p
< 1 .0 V GND
s w ich in g /in d u ctive

Terminal Description Amax


90 switching/inductive 2.5 mm²
91 Pickup 2.5 mm²
92 GND 2.5 mm²

Specification of the input circuit for inductive speed sensors

Ambient temperature: 25 °C

Signal forming sinusoidal


Minimum input voltage of 200..10,000 Hz < 0.5 Veff
Minimum input voltage of 300.. 5,000 Hz < 0.3 Veff

Note
When the ambient temperature rises, the minimum input voltage is increased by ap-
prox. 0.3 V/°C.

Input Voltage in Dependence of the Frequency [Ueff]

2,5
Effective Input Voltage [V]

1,5

0,5

0
100 1000 10000 100000
Frequency [Hz]

Figure 1: Typical behaviour of the input voltage sensitivity at an ambient temperature of 25°C.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 11/153
1.2.4 Auxiliary and Control Outputs
• Power circuit breaker
m ax. 250 V AC

15 14
C om m and: close G C B
GCB

17 16
C om m and: close M C B
MCB

40 39
C om m and: open M C B
MCB

4 2 41
C om m and: open G C B
GCB

Root Switched Description Amax


14 15 Generator power circuit breaker close 2.5 mm²
16 17 Mains circuit breaker close 2.5 mm²
39 40 Opening the Mains Circuit Breaker 2.5 mm²
41 42 Opening the Generator Power Circuit Breaker 2.5 mm²

• Relay (general)
m ax. 250 V AC

A
R elay output
external device

Root Switched Description B Amax


A B
18 19 Readiness for operation 2.5 mm²
43 44 Operating magnet / Stopping magnet 2.5 mm²
45 46 Starter 2.5 mm²
33 34 Relay 1 (RM) 2.5 mm²
35 36 Relay 2 (RM) 2.5 mm²
37 38 Relay 3 (RM; pre-assigned: Preheat / Ignition ON 2.5 mm²
47 48 Relay 4 (RM; Centralized alarm horn 2.5 mm²
(RM)..parameterizable with the relay manager

a.) Analog Outputs (Option A2)


IA
A

A na lo g o utpu t
0V
B

I 0V Description Amax
A B
120 121 Analog output 0/4..20 mA 1.5 mm²
122 123 Analog output 0/4..20 mA 1.5 mm²

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 12/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
1.2.5 Governor Ou tputs (Standard / Options Qf/Qu)
The governors of the standard version are designed as three-position controllers
[made of a change-over contact and a make contact; please refer to the description
in the following chapter a.)]. If options Qu or Qf are ordered, they are designed as
quasi-continuous governors with analog outputs [please refer to the following chap-
ter b.)]. In addition to this, further parameterization masks are displayed.

a.) Three-position Controller (Standard)

m ax. 250 V AC

9 10
S peed / pow er Lower

controller H ig h e r
S peed / pow er
controller
C o m m on

8
11 12 13
V oltage / pow er factor Lower

controller H ig h e r
V oltage / pow er
factor controller
C o m m on

Terminal Assignment Description Amax


8 common 2.5 mm²
9 higher Speed/power controller 2.5 mm²
10 lower 2.5 mm²
11 common Voltage-/cos ϕ-controller 2.5 mm²
12 higher 2.5 mm²
13 lower (only for version "synchronous" ) 2.5 mm²

b.) Analog Controller Output (Options Qf/Qu)

0V 0V
9 10
0V 0V
UA 0V S peed / pow er
UA 0V
controller
IA IA
8

0V 0V
11 12 13

0V 0V
UA 0V V oltage / cosphi
UA 0V
controller
IA IA

Terminal Assignment Description Amax


I UA
8 I 2.5 mm²
9 0V UA Speed/power controller 2.5 mm²
10 0V 0V 2.5 mm²
11 I
Voltage-/power factor controller 2.5 mm²
12 0V UA 2.5 mm²
(only for "synchronous"version )
13 0V 0V 2.5 mm²

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 13/153
1.2.6 Interface (O ptions Su/Sb/Sf)

A B C D E A B C D E A B C D E A B C D E

B (in verted)

R xD -

T xD -
A (n o n -inverted)

R xD +

C A N -L
T xD +

T erm in ation
C TS
R xD

GND

T xD

GND

NC

GND

C A N -H
R TS

T h e tra n s m itte r d riv e s th e cu rre n t.


M O D bus R TU slave
R S 23 2 interface

R S 48 5 interface

T T Y interface

C A N bus
In terface

In terface

In terface

In terface
Terminal Description
Whether the terminals are designated X or Y depends on the configuration of the system.
Please refer to the wiring diagram (A = X/Y, B = X/Y, etc.)
A (X1/Y1) B (X2/Y2) C (X3/Y3) D (X4/Y4) E (X5/Y5)
RxD RTS GND CTS TxD RS232
GND B A RS485, MOD bus RTU slave
RxD- RxD+ NC TxD- TxD+ TTY (transm. drives the current)
GND CAN-H CAN-L CAN bus

NOTE

Please note that the CAN bus must be terminated with an impedance which corresponds to the
wave impedance of the cable (e.g. 120 Ohm). The terminating resistor is positioned between CAN-
H and CAN-L on the motor CAN bus.

NOTE

For the parameterization via the parameterization connector (direct parameterization) you need a
direct parameterization cable (order code "DPC"), the program LeoPC 1 (supplied with the cable)
and the corresponding configuration files. Please consult the online help installed when the
program is installed for a description of the LeoPC 1 PC program and its setup.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 14/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
2 Description of Functions

2.1 What to con sider when using ...


2.1.1 ... the differe nt options
In accordance with its configuration, the unit may differ from the maximum expansion
via the following characteristics:
• The inputs and outputs may be installed or not. Please check the wiring diagram
and the notes referring to the corresponding options. Refer to the type plate to see
whether or not the corresponding option is contained in the unit. If the type plate
was removed you can scroll through all parameterization masks and combine indi-
vidual options with the aid of this operating manual.
• There are various parameterization masks for the various types of interfaces.

2.1.2 ... equipmen ts with one power circuit breaker


If a device with a 2-circuit breaker logic circuit [N2PB] or with a 1-circuit breaker logic
circuit [N1PB] is used for an application with one power circuit breaker, the following
applies:
• If the equipment is to be operated in isolated(parallel)operation, the following sig-
nals must be deposited (as a rule, the following applies: Term. 53 always negatedto
term. 54):
- Never connect terminal 53 (no MCB enable),
- Set emergency operation to "OFF",
- Set mains decoupling to "GLS",
- "Response: MCB is open" / "isolated operation" (term. 54): HIGH-signal (log. "1")
and
- "MCB enable" (terminal 53): LOW-signal (logic "0").
- Condition: The "emergency power" mask must be set to "OFF".
• [not NEB] If the equipment is to be operated in isolated(parallel)operation, the fol-
lowing signals must be deposited (as a rule, the following applies: Term. 53 always
negatedto term. 54):
- "Reply: MCB is open" / "isolated operation" (term. 54): LOW-signal (log. "0") and
- "MCB enable" (terminal 53): HIGH signal (logical "1").

2.1.3 ... equipmen ts with asynchronous generators


If systems with systems with asynchronous generators are used, the following must
be noted:
• Systems with asynchronous generators are 1-LS-equipments [N1PB].
• Connect the remanent voltage to the terminals 23/24. Terminal 23/24 has a zoom
function as long as the unit is not operated in parallel with the mains, as the un-
stimulated synchronous generator is not yet able to generate voltage. If the unit is
operated in parallel with the mains, this input is no longer taken into consideration.
Control is carried out on the basis of voltage measurement at terminals 20/21/22
and 50/51/52.
• Use a device with a 2-circuit breaker logic circuit [N2PB], make sure that the input
"response: MCB is open" is controlled by a continuous LOW-signal (e. g. do not
connect or link with the terminal 7 "Common"). As a result of this, the closed nature
of the MCB and unit operation in parallel with the mains are simulated to the unit.
• Connect the terminal 53 " MCB enable" to a continuous HIGH-signal (e.. g. connect
with the terminal 1 "power supply"). This informs the unit that it is in operation in
parallel with the mains. Power control is carried out.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 15/153
2.2 Table of Set points

Control via
Automatic 1

Automatic 2

interface ON

Ext. setpoint
value ON
Specification of Setpoint value through
1 X X X Setpoint 1
0 1 OFF OFF Setpoint 2
0 1 OFF ON Externally via 0/4..20 mA input
0 1 ON X Externally via serial interface
0 0 OFF OFF Standby only emergency power

2.3 Control Inpu ts

NOTE

Any possible emergency power ("Emergency power" parameterization screen must be set to ON) or
sprinkler operation (terminal 6 must be parameterized accordingly) will be carried out in the "TEST"
and "AUTOMATIC" operating modes regardless of the digital inputs "Automatic 1" and "Auto-
matic 2". If terminals 3 and 5 are set simultaneously, preference is given to terminal 3.

Automatic 1 Selection of the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" with the "setpoint of the active
Terminal 3 load 1"
Set.................. If the device is set to the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" (selected by
means of the selector switch for operating modes located at the front
side) the "setpoint of the active load 1" is adjusted while in operation
in parallel with the mains.In the case of a fixed power (F), the unit is
started immediately and operation in parallel with the mains is com-
menced following the synchronization of the generator power circuit
breaker. In the case of incoming (B) or outgoing power (L), starting is
determined by automatic an start/settle operation. If no automatic
start/settle operation is carried out, the unit is started immediately.
The setpoint value can be modified via both the parameterization
mode and via the "up/down" buttons in "AUTOMATIC" mode.
Reset ............. If neither the sprinkler nor the emergency power operation are acti-
vated, the genset is shut down and then switched off after coasting.

Automatic 2 Selection of the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" with the "setpoint of the active
Terminal 5 load 2"
Set.................. If the device is set to the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" (selected by
means of the selector switch for operating modes located at the front
side) the "setpoint of the active load 2" is adjusted while in operation
in parallel with the mains. In the case of a fixed power (F), the unit is
started immediately and operation in parallel with the mains is com-
menced following the synchronization of the generator power circuit
breaker. In the case of incoming (B) or outgoing power (L), starting is
determined by automatic boost/buck operation. If no automatic
boost/buck operation is carried out, the unit is started immediately.
The setpoint value can be modified via both the parameterization
mode and via the "up/down" buttons in "AUTOMATIC" mode.
Reset ............. If neither the sprinkler nor the emergency power operation are acti-
vated, the genset is shut down and then switched off after coasting.

If the external definition of a setpoint value is activated (e. g. by an analog input


0/4..20 mA or by a bidirectional interface), the external setpoint is adjusted via the
digital input (see table of setpoints).

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 16/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Multifunction Digital input terminal 6 may reveal different functions according to the following
Terminal 6 description. Please note that, when used as a sprinkler input, the digital input re-
veals negative functional logic. The logic circuit is selected by means of a param-
eterization mask (chapter 4.9.3 "Setting the Function of Terminal 6 ", page 98).

• Sprinkler By resetting the terminal 6 (application of a Low-level) the sprinkler operation is activated
according to the description of functions. This is terminated by setting terminal 6 (application of
a High signal). Attention: Negative functional logic! (For the function of the sprinkler operation
please also refer to the chapter 2.12 "Sprinkler Operation" on page 36.)

• Motor release Here, the terminal 6 has the same function as the STOP-button: Resetting the terminal 6 (appli-
cation of a LOW-level) avoids that the engine is started and stops a genset which is already
running; the application of a HIGH-level releases the start of the genset. Attention: Via this
function, emergency power operation is also prevented or aborted. Emergency power is not
possible without this release signal! The motor release function is only possible in "AUTO-
MATIC" operating mode.

• ext. acknowledge While in the operationg modes "STOP" and "AUTOMATIC" external errors may be acknowl-
edged by setting the terminal 6 (change of slope from a LOW- to a HIGH-level). In order to
achieve further acknowledgment, terminal 6 must accordingly first be reset and then set again.
If a continuous HIGH signal is present at terminal 6, this has no effect on the acknowledgment
and suppression of fault messages.

• no CB by start If the terminal 6 is set, the genset starts, no synchronization is carried out and the generator
power circuit breaker is not switched on (no switching to the black busbar). The PCB is only
switched on in case of emergency current. After the return of the mains the transfer to the mains
is carried out according to the preset switch logic. The start via the terminal 6 is more significant
than the start via the terminals 3/5. If terminal 6 was selected, the terminals 3/5 are ignored. If,
for the circuit breaker logic "Parallel", the genset is set to operation parallel with the mains, and
if the terminal 6 is activated, the GCB is opened after a power reduction. The genset keeps on
running in no-load operation with the GCB open. By deactivating the terminal 6 the genset is
shut down without coasting.

Operating condition Possible


emerg. power Terminal 6 Automatic 1 Automatic 2 function:
0 1 x x Start without CB
0 0 1 x Automatic 1
0 0 0 1 Automatic 2
1 x x x emerg. power

Reply: GCB is open With this input (logic "1") the open nature of the generator power circuit breaker is
Terminal 4 announced to the device (the light-emitting diode 10 "GCB ON" is off).

[NEB, N2PB] With this input (logic "1") the open nature of the generator power circuit breaker is
Reply: MCB is open announced to the device (the light-emitting diode 11 "MCB ON" is off).
Terminal 54

Isolated operation With this input (logic "0") the devices receives the annunciation that the genset is
Terminal 54 working in isolated operation (the light-emitting diode 11 "Mains parallel" is off). This
digital input is used to decide whether, after closing the GCB, frequency control
(terminal 54 = logical "1") or power control (terminal 54 = logical "0") is to be carried
out.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 17/153
[NEB, N2PB] Set.................. An [N2PB] operation in parallel with the mains is possible and the
Release MCB mains circuit breaker is operated.
Terminal 53 Reset ............. An isolated operation is carried out (frequency and voltage regula-
tion), and the mains circuit breaker is not operated.

[NEB, N1PB] The input signal of this digital input must always be negated in connection with the
Release MCB digital input "response: MCB is open" / "isolated operation" (terminal 54).
Terminal 53

Digital Inputs Programmable error inputs with clear text display, error class, delay, engine start
Terminals 61-74 delay and and closed /working current release (description starting from page 96).

2.4 Control Outp uts


Readiness for operation Setting the relay signals the readiness for operation of the unit. If this relay drops off,
Terminal 18/19 a faultless operation of the device cannot be guaranteed. Make sure to take the
appropriate measures if this relay has dropped out (e.g. open GCB, switch off the
engine).

Preheating (diesel unit) By setting this relay, the diesel unit is preheated (see description of functions start-
pre-assigned to relay 3, terminals 37/38 ing process diesel unit, pages 22/111).

Ignition "ON" (gas engine) By setting this relay, the ignition of the gas engine is switched on (see description of
pre-assigned to relay 3, terminals 37/38 functions starting process gas engine, pages 24/111).

Starting relay (diesel unit) By setting this relay the start will be released for the drive unit. If the unit is to be
Terminals 43/44 shut down the relay will immediately drop off. If the speed of the genset drops below
the settable ignition speed, the relay also drops out (see description of functions
starting process diesel engine, pages 22/111).

Gas valve (gas engine) By setting this relay the gas valve for the gas unit will be opened. If the unit is to be
Terminals 43/44 shut down the relay will immediately drop out. If the speed of the genset drops be-
low the settable ignition speed, the relay also drops out (see description of functions
starting process gas engine, pages 24/111).

Starter By setting this relay the starter will be engaged. When reaching the ignition speed or
Terminals 45/46 in case of a STOP the starter is reset (see chapter 4.12.2 "Determination of the
Engine Type " from page 110).

Centralized alarm By setting this relay, a centralized alarm is output. It is possible to trigger for in-
stance a horn or a buzzer. The operator can reset the relay by pressing the push-
pre-assigned to relay 7, terminals 47/48
button "clear" for a short period. The relay will be set again if another fault occurs.
The centralized alarm is set for errors of the error class F1 to F3 (see page 41).

Command: GCB close By setting this relay the generator power circuit breaker (GCB) will be closed. If the
Terminals 14/15 connection of the GCB has been parameterized to continuous pulse, the "Reply:
GCB is open" the relay is maintained in its closed state; this is also the case if the
voltages of the generator and the generator busbar are identical. In the event of a
fault of the class 2 or 3, or the GCB is to be opened, this relay drops out. If the con-
nection of the GCB was not programmed by means of a continuous pulse the relay
drops out again after the pulse is issued.

Command: GCB open By setting this relay the GCB will be opened. Following "Reply: GCB is open", the
Terminals 41/42 relay output is removed.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 18/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
[NEB, N2PB] By setting this relay the MCB will be closed. This output is always a add-on pulse,
Command: GCB close i. e, the locking of the mains circuit breaker must be carried out externally.
Terminals 16/17

[NEB, N2PB] By setting this relay the MCB will be opened. Following "Reply: MCB is open", the
Command: MCB close relay output is removed.
Terminals 39/40

Additional relays R1 to R4 These relays are managed by the "relay manager" (see page 109).
Term. 74..83, 33..38, 47/48
Presettings:
• Number of relay (e. g. relay 1 = error class 1, relay 2 = error class 2, etc.)
• Relay 3 = ignition / preheating
• Relay 4 = Centralized alarm

2.5 Clear Text D isplay


Operating and fault messages are displayed in the bottom row in the display. With
the button "Message" it is possible to switch over to the subsequent masks.

2.5.1 Functional M essages of the Device on the Display


Relay messages The subsequent relay outputs for the engine or generator control are also indicated
on the display:
• Synchronization of GCB or MCB "Synchr.GCB" / "Synchr.MCB"
• Add-on GCB or MCB "Synchr.GCB" / "Synchr.MCB"
• Switching to the black busbar GCB or. MCB
"Deadbus GCB" / "Deadbus MCB"
• Starting "Start"
• Preheating (diesel engine) "Preglow"
• Purging operation (gas engine) "turning"
• Initial state (diesel engine): f- permanent signal of the speed govenor is set prior
to the genset start "goven. down"
• Auxiliary operations Pre-travel/ coasting "prerun aux." / "postrun aux."

"Start-Pause" An interrupted starting process is displayed with the message "Start pause".

"Testmode" If the operating mode "Test" is selected, this message is output.

"Load Test" If the operating mode "Test" is selected after activating the button "GCB ON", and if
a load test is selected, this message is output.

"Emergency" This message displays a current case of emergency power.

"Emer/Spri." This message is active, if emergency power and sprinkler request are activated
simultaneously.

"mains delay" This message in the display shows the mains settling time following a mains fault.

"Sprinkler" This message is shown in the display during sprinkler operation.

"CooldShutd." Following sprinkler operation, the unit operates without load for 10 minutes. This
message is shown in the display during this period.

"coasting" No-load operation (unit cooling) prior to unit shutdown is displayed with this mes-
sage.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 19/153
"Engine Stop" When stopping the unit, a starting block is set for 10 seconds on negative deviation
from the firing speed. This message displays the operating condition.

NOTE

The indication of the texts "sprinkler operation", "emergency power", "test" and "load test" alternates
with the basic mask. If one of these texts is active, the actuation of the "Select" button switches to
the continuous display of the basic display screen. This can be undone again by actuating the
"Acknowledge" button.

2.5.2 Functional M essages of the Device on the Display


Messages of the protective device The following messages are output by the monitor functions:
• Undervoltage generator or mains (only after mains decoupling)
"G-.underv." / "M-undervolt"
• Overvoltage generator or mains (only after mains decoupling)
"G-Overvolt." / "M-overvolt."
• Undervoltage generator or mains (only after mains decoupling)
"low freque." / "M-underfrq."
• Overfrequency generator or mains (only after mains decoupling)
"over freq." / "M-overfreq."
• phase shift "Vectorjump"
• Overspeed (pickup tripping) "over speed"
• Generator overload "G-overload"
• Reverse-/reduced load "power fail"
• Generator overcurrent 1 "Gen.curr. 1"
• Generator overcurrent 2 "Gen.curr. 2"
• Battery undervoltage "Bat.undervo"

Messages of the digital inputs The text assigned in the relevant screen is output as a fault message. At the same
time, fault output for the fault class which has been set occurs.

"Pickup/fre." This fault message is output on the display if the deviation (≈10 Hz) of the pickup
speed from the generator frequency is too large.

"error Y1Y5" Interface Y1..Y5 malfunction. External control signals cannot be received.

"error X1X5" Interface X1..X5 malfunction. External control signals cannot be received.

"GCB syn.fai"/"GCB failure" If the synchronization time or the connect time for the generator power circuit
breaker has been exceeded, this message is shown in the display. At the same
time, a fault class F1 fault is output.

"MCB syn.fai"/"MCB failure" If the synchronization time or the connect time for the mains power circuit breaker
has been exceeded, this message is shown in the display. At the same time, a fault
class F1 fault is output.

"GCB failure" If the GCB cannot be activated after 5 attempts, this message is output on the dis-
play. If it is present 2 seconds following the "Command: GCB open" pulse, this mes-
sage is also indicated. At the same time, a fault class F1 fault is output. An output of
this malfunction via the relay manager is possible.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 20/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
"MCB failure If the MCB is still open after 5 attempts, this message is output on the display. If it is
still present 2 seconds following the "command: MCB open" pulse, this message is
also indicated. At the same time, a fault class F1 fault is output. An output of this
malfunction via the relay manager is possible.

"power zero" The power circuit breaker logic "interchange synchronization" has been selected and
the MCB is to be opened. If the incoming power zero cannot be adjusted within the
time set in the "Max. boost/buck ramp time" screen, this message is displayed.

"Start fail" This message is output following three unsuccessful starting attempts. No further
attempt at starting is made. In sprinkler operation, starting is attempted six times
before this message is displayed.

"stop fail" If speed is still detected 30 seconds following the stop signal, the message "Shutoff
malfunction" is output with an F3 fault shutoff.

"Service" Following the expiry of the maintenance interval, the imminence of the next mainte-
nance is displayed with this message.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 21/153
2.6 Description Start-/Stop Procedure
2.6.1 Diesel Unit

1 5 0 0 1 /m in

S ta rt fre q u e n cy
f-c o n tr. + tim e
ZD

S peed governor

A pproach idle
ga s position

E ngine m onitoring
activated

S tart request

S tart relay

P re-glow

S tarter 0,5 s 0,5 s

t/s
t S ta t VG t E in t SP Z t VG t E in tM V tN
Delayed engine
monitoring 00s

Ignition sp eed reached

S ta rt a tte m p t S ta rt a tte m p t
u n su cce ssfu l su cce ssfu l
S ta rt S to p

The formula signs and indices mean:


tSta ............................ approach idle gas position [s]
tVG ............................ preheating time [s]
tOn ............................ engagement time [s]
tSPZ ........................... interval between two start attempts [s]
tMV ............................ delayed motor monitoring [s]
tN .............................. coasting time [s]

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 22/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
a.) Starting Process

Explanation by means of entered data (see page 111, chapter 4.12.2b.))

approach idle gas position (ON/OFF) ON


preheating time (0..99 s) tVG = 3 s
engagement time (0..99 s) tEZ = 5 s
interval between two start attempts (0..99 s) tSPZ = 10 s

Function If the device is equipped with a three-position frequency controller, the relay "lower
frequency" is output for the time "intitial state frequency controller" prior to the starting
process. Then the relay "Preheating" will be set for the period of the preheating time.
Following preheating, the operating magnet is first set, and then the starter. When
the adjustable firing speed is exceeded, the starter is disengaged again, and the op-
erating magnet is held via the firing speed. After reaching "starting frequency f-
controller" of the speed governor and following the time lag, the speed govenor is ac-
tivated.

b.) Stop Procedure

Coasting time (0..999 s) tN = 3 s

Function By resetting the operation bit, the power is reduced ( provided that the active load
controller is switched on). After opening the generator power circuit breaker, the
coasting time is started, and the motor rotates without load. After terminating the
coasting time, the magnetic relay is reset. The motor is stopped. If the firing speed is
not reached, motor starting is prevented for a firmly prespecified time of 10 seconds.
If the motor cannot be stopped by the magnetic relay, the "shutoff malfunction" fault
message appears after 30 s, a class 3 fault is output.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 23/153
2.6.2 Gas Engine

T im e ju m p w ith o u t P ic ku p a ctiv e : < 1 5 H z


1 5 0 0 1 /m in
m in . s p e e d s ta rte r is n o t re a c h e d
S ta rt fre q u e n c y
f-c o n tr. + tim e
Z D (1 )
m in . s p e e d s ta rte r
(P ic k u p O N )
[1 /m in ] (2 ) [1 /m in ]

S peed governor

A pproach idle
gas position

E ngine m onitoring
activated

S tart request

G as valve

Ignition

S tarter

t/s
tS t tZ V tS P Z tZ V tG V tM V tN tZ N
Delayed engine
monitoring 00s

Ig n itio n sp e e d re ache d

S ta rt a tte m p t S ta rt a tte m p t
u n su cce ssfu l su cce ssfu l

S ta rt S to p
S p e e d cu rv e w ith P ic ku p (1 ) D is e n g a g in g o f th e s ta rte r (2 ) S w itc h in g -o n o f
S p e e d cu rv e w ith o u t P ic ku p th e ig n itio n
Ig n itio n a n d g a s O N

The formula signs and indices mean:


tSt ............................. approach idle gas position
tZV ............................ firing delay [s]
tGV ............................ gas delay [s]
tEZ ............................ engagement time [s]
tSPZ ........................... interval between two start attempts [s]
tMV ............................ delayed engine monitoring [s]
tZN ............................ ignition coasting [s]
tN .............................. coasting time [s]
(1) ............................ disengagement of the starter; ignition and gas ON
(2) ............................ starting of ignition and gas

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 24/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
a.) Start Procedure

Explanation by means of entered data (see page 111, chapter 4.12.2a.))

approach idle gas position (ON/OFF) ON


firing delay (0..99 s) tZV = 3 s
gas delay (0..99 s) tGV = 8 s
engagement time (0..99 s) tEZ = 15 s
interval between two start attempts (0..99 s) tSPZ = 10 s

Function If the device is equipped with a three-position frequency controller, a permanent


signal (time adjustable) is output at the relay output "frequency lower". The starter is
then set. Following the firing delay time and as soon as the genset is rotating at least
at the parameterized "Ignition speed Starting" the ignition is then switched on. Fol-
lowing the expiry of the gas delay, the gas valve is then switched on. If the starting
attempt is successful, i.e., the firing speed was exceeded, the starter is disengaged
again. The gas valve and the ignition are held via the firing speed. After reaching the
"starting frequency f-controller" and following the time lag, the speed governor is then
activated.

Starting process The gas valve is held via the ignition speed. The ignition is held via the minimum
speed (at pickup) or is shut down at < 15 Hz (without pickup).

b.) Stop Procedures

Coasting time (0..999 s) TZN = 3 s


"Engine Stop" 10 s TMst = 10 s
"Shutdown fault" 30 s Tab = 30 s

Function By resetting the starting request the power is reduced (provided that the active power
controller is switched on). After opening the generator power circuit breaker, the
coasting time is started, and the motor rotates without load. After terminating the
coasting time the gas valve relay is reset. The motor is stopped. If the firing speed is
not reached, motor starting is prevented for a firmly prespecified time of 10 s sec-
onds. If the motor cannot be stopped, the "Shutoff malfunction" fault message ap-
pears after 30 s, a class 3 fault is output.

Without pickup: following a negative deviation of the ignition speed the ignition relay
remains set for another 5 seconds for the combustion of the remaining gas.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 25/153
2.7 Operation o f the Power Circuit Breakers
Preset limits admissible • voltage Ugen 75..115 % Usetpoint
Generator • frequency fgen 88..112 % frated

Preset limits admissible • voltage USS 85..112 % Usetpoint


Busbar • frequency fSS 90..110 % frated

NOTE

For the description of the switch logics please refer to the chapter 4.6.1 "Circuit Breaker Logic" from
page 77.

2.7.1 Synchroniza tion of the Generator Power Circuit Breakers


The generator power circuit breaker (GCB) will be synchronized with frequency and
voltage correction if the following conditions are met simultaneously.

Automatic operation:
• the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" is selected;
• one of the circuit breaker logics "operation in parallel with the mains", "softload-
ing" or "no-break transfer" are activated while in parameterization mode;
• no fault class 2 or 3 error is present;
• on input "Automatic 1" (terminal 3) or "Automatic 2" (terminal 5) is applied, or the
remote starting signal is activated via the interface;
• voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the genset is running, and the generator voltage and frequency are within the
preset limits (see above);
• the genset is running, and the busbar voltage and frequency are within the preset
limits;
• the delayed engine monitoring has been executed

Manual operation:
• "MANUAL" operating mode has been selected
• one of the circuit breaker logics "operation in parallel with the mains", "softload-
ing" or "no-break transfer" is actived while in parameterization mode;
• no fault class 2 or 3 fault is present;
• voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the genset is running, and the generator voltage and frequency are within the
preset limits (see above);
• the genset is running, and the busbar voltage and frequency are within the preset
limits;
• the button "GCB ON" has been

Load test operation:


• the operating mode "TEST" is selected;
• one of the circuit breaker logics "operation in parallel with the mains", " softload-
ing " or "no-break transfer" are activated while in parameterization mode;
• no fault class 2 or 3 error is present;
• voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the genset is running, and the generator voltage and frequency are within the
preset limits (see above);
• the genset is running, and the busbar voltage and frequency are within the preset
limits;
• the button "GCB ON" has been activated.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 26/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
2.7.2 Close Gene rator Power Circuit Breaker without Synchronization (Black Start GCB)
The generator power circuit breaker is closed without synchronization if the following
conditions are met simultaneously:

Automatic operation:
• the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" is selected;
• no fault class 2 or 3 fault is present;
• the release of "Black start GCB" is set to "ON"while in parameterization mode,;
• no voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the genset is running, and the generator voltage and frequency are within the
preset limits (see page 26);
• Busbar voltage is <20 V;
• the "response: MCB is open" exists (the MCB is open);
• with a load sharing via CAN-Bus (Leonhard-devices)
- none of the GCBs may be closed if a isolated operation in parallel with other
gensets is possible,
- the device with the lowest device number will be the first to close its GCB (see
chapter 4.3 "Configuration of the Basic Settings" on page 53).

Manual operation:
• "MANUAL" operating mode has been selected
• no fault class 2 or 3 fault is present;
• no voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the genset is running, and the generator voltage and frequency are within the
preset limits (see page 26);
• Busbar voltage is <20 V;
• the "response: MCB is open" exists (the MCB is open);
• with a load sharing via CAN-Bus (Leonhard-devices)
- none of the GCBs may be closed if an isolated operation in parallel with other
gensets is possible,
- the device with the lowest device number will be the first to close its GCB (see
chapter 4.3 "Configuration of the Basic Settings" on page 53).

Generator monitors switched off:


If the generator monitors are switched off, the switch logic and the control system are
controlled by internally defined limit values.

Generator monitor Voltage Frequency


ON Monitor values Monitor values
OFF UGen. < 75 % Urated fGen. < 88 % frated
UGen. > 115 % Urated fGen. > 112 % frated

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 27/153
2.7.3 Synchroniza tion of the Mains Circuit Breakers
The mains power circuit breaker will be synchronized with frequency and voltage cor-
rection if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

Automatic operation:
• the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" is selected;
• one of the circuit breaker logics "operation in parallel with the mains", "softload-
ing" or "no-break transfer" is activated while in parameterization mode;
• no error class 2 or 3 fault is present;
• voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the mains voltage is applied and within the admissible limits;
• in emergency power operation, the "mains settling time" has finished;
• the genset is running, and the busbar voltage and frequency are within the preset
limits;
• [NEB] The limits for the admissible synchronization are set in the masks
mains under-/-overvoltage and –frequency ;
• the "response: GCB is open" is not present (the GCB is closed);
• the input "release MCB" is set;
• [NxPB] If the mains watchdogs are switched off, the mains values apply as fol-
lows:

Mains monitor Voltage Frequency


ON Monitor values Monitor values
OFF 85..112.5 % 90..110 %

Manual operation:
• "MANUAL" operating mode has
been selected
• one of the circuit breaker logics "operation in parallel with the mains", softloading"
or "no-break-transfer" is activated while in parameterization mode;
• no fault class 2 or 3 fault is present;
• voltage is applied to the busbar;
• mains voltage is applied;
• the genset is running, and the generator busbar voltage and frequency are within
the the preset limits (see page 26);
• the "response: GCB is open" is not present (the GCB is closed);
• the input "release MCB" is set;
• the button "MCB ON" has been activated;
• Load test: With the termination of the load test (circuit breaker logics "softloading"
or "no-break-transfer") the GCB opens.

2.7.4 Close Mains Circuit Breaker without Synchronization (Black Start MCB)
The mains power circuit breaker is closed without synchronization if the following
conditions are met simultaneously:

Automatic operation:
• the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" has been selected;
• the release "black start MCB" is set to "ON"while inparameterization mode;
• no voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the mains voltage is applied (in the case of emergency power the mains settling
time has been finished);
• the genset is running, and the mains voltage and frequency are within the preset
limits;
• the "response: GCB is open" is present (the GCB is open);
• the input "release MCB" is set.
• With a load sharing via CAN-Bus (Leonhard-devices)
- none of the MCBs may be closed if a isolated operation in parallel with other
gensets is possible,
- the device with the lowest device number will be the first to close its MCB (see
chapter 4.3 "Configuration of the Basic Settings" on page 53).

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 28/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Manual operation:
• the operating mode "MANUAL" has been selected;
• no voltage is applied to the busbar;
• the mains voltage is applied;
• the "response: GCB is open" is present (the GCB is open);
• the input "release MCB" is set;
• the button "MCB ON" has been activated.
• with a load sharing via CAN-Bus (Leonhard-devices)
- none of the MCBs may be closed in case of a isolated operation in parallel with
other gensets,
- the device with the lowest device number will be the first to close its MCB (see
chapter 4.3 "Configuration of the Basic Settings" on page 53).

2.7.5 Opening the Generator Power Circuit Breaker


The generator power circuit breaker is opened both when the relay "Command:
Close GCB" drops out (only if "continuous pulse" has been selected in parameteriza-
tion mode), and via the closure of the relay "Command: Open GCB". The GCB will be
opened under the following circumstances:

• In case of a response of a mains monitor with decoupling to GCB;


• while in operating mode "STOP";
• if error class 2 or 3 occurs;
• when actuating the button "GCB OFF" or "MCB ON" (depending on the preset
switch logic) while in manual operation;
• when actuating the button "STOP" while in manual operation;
• when actuating the button "GCB OFF" or "MCB ON" (depending on the preset
switch logic) while in load test operation;
• when settling automatically while in the operating mode AUTOMATIC;
• after the no-break-transfer of the MCB;
• prior to switching to the black busbar of the MCB in a automatic transfer switch-
ing;
• while in sprinkler operation, provided that no emergency power case is present;
• after the softloading of the MCB,
• in the setting "automatic switch unblocking" the relay "Command: Open GCB" is
set for 1 second prior to each switch-on command.

2.7.6 Opening the Mains Circuit Breaker


The mains power circuit breaker is opened via the closure of the relay "Command:
Open MCB" (the "continuous pulse" setting is not possible in the case of the MCB).
The MCB will be opened under the following circumstances:

• In case of a respond of a mains monitor, provided that the mains decoupling is


set to MCB ;
• In the case that the emergency power (loss of mains) is responding;
• following the no-break-transfer of the GCB;
• prior to the closing of the GCB in an automatic transfer switching;
• when actuating the button "MCB OFF" or "GCB ON" (depending on the preset
switch logic) while in manual operation;
• when actuating the button "MCB OFF" or "GCB ON" (depending on the preset
switch logic) while in load test operation;
• following the softloading of the MCB,
• in the setting "automatic switch unblocking" the relay "Command: open MCB " is
set for 1 second prior to each switch-on command.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 29/153
2.8 Control of th e Power Circuit Breakers
The closing and opening operations of the generator power circuit breaker (GCB)
and the mains power circuit breaker (MCB) are described in the following diagram.
The pulses are switched over in the mask desribed below, with the signal sequence
being affected as indicated (the control of the mains circuit breaker cannot be ef-
fected by means of a continuous impulse). If the "Automatic switch release" screen is
set to "ON", an open pulse is output prior to each close pulse. The "MCB release" in-
hibits the switching-on of the mains circuit breaker. A closed mains circuit breaker will
not be opened.

C o n n e c tio n tim e
1 2 3 8
R e le a s e
MCB

T im e /s

4 7
C o n n e c tio n im p u ls e
M C B 'C L O S E ' (1 6 /1 7 )

T im e /s

D is c o n n e c tio n im p u ls e 9 13
G C B 'O P E N ' (4 1 /4 2 )
M C B 'O P E N ' (3 9 /4 0 ) 2/0,8 s
12

T im e /s

R e p ly 5 6 11
G C B 'O P E N ' (4 /7 )
M C B 'O P E N ' (5 4 /7 )
10

T im e /s

GCB closing Switching of continuous impulse ↔ Switch-on-/off impulse


relay °°°°°°°° constant.. continuous impulse (upper signal sequence in the following diagram)
impulse ... Switch-on-/off impulse (lower signal sequence in the following diagram)
Continuous 4 9
pulse
GLS 'ZU' (14/15)

Time/s

4 7
Opening pulse
GLS 'ZU' (14/15)

Time/s

Switch on-/off impulse 1release MCB; 2 Synchronisation; 3 Add-on time reached:


GCB and MCB Æ 3 CLOSE GCB/MCB : 4 Switch-on impulse GCB/MCB set; 5 switcher time

delay; 6 response GCB/MCB; 7 Switch-on impulse deleted;


Æ 8 OPEN GCB/MCB ; 9 Switch-off impulse GCB/MCB set; 10 switcher time

delay; 1 response GCB/MCB; 12 specified time (1 second); 13 switch-off im-


pulse deleted.

Continuous impulse 1release GCB; 2 Synchronisation; 1 Add-on time reached;


only GCB Æ 1 CLOSE GCB : 4 Continuous impulse GCB set; 5 switcher time

delay; 6 response GCB;


Æ 8 OPEN GCB ; 9 continuous impulse deleted; 10 switcher time de-

lay; 1 response GCB; 12 switch-off impulse deleted.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 30/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
2.9 Monitoring o f the Power Circuit Breaker
2.9.1 Add-on Time Monitoring
If the mask "Add-on monitoring" is set to "ON", time monitoring of the synchronization
is effected (monitoring of the add-on for asynchronous generators) : If the synchroni-
zation of the GCB or MCB is started, the time counter is started following the expiry
of delayed motor monitoring. If after the preset time, the power circuit breaker has not
been closed, the warning message "Synchronisation time of the GCB exceeded" (for
asynchronous generators "Add-on time of the GCB exceeded") or "Synchronisation
time of the MCB exceeded" (for asynchronous generators "Add-on time of the MCB
exceeded") is output as an F1-error.

2.9.2 Circuit Break er Monitoring

NOTE

If during active "MCB monitoring", circuit breaker monitoring, a fault is detected on closing the MCB,
this is carried out during activated emergency power.

while CLOSING If the mask "monitoring GCB" or "monitoring MCB" is set to "ON", monitoring of the
generator and mains circuit breakers is carried out (exception: The power circuit
breaker logic is set to "EXTERNAL"). If the circuit breaker cannot be activated by the
fifth attempt, a fault class F1 "GCB malfunction" or "MCB malfunction" fault message
is output. In the relay manager (see chapter 4.11.2 "Relay Manager" from page 109)
a relay is set with the parameter 74 or 75.

while OPENING If 2 seconds following an OPEN-pulse (opening of the GCB or MCB) the response is
detected that the GCB or MCB is closed, this also leads to the output of an error with
the message "malfunction GCB" or "malfunction MCB". In the relay manager, a relay
is set with the parameter 76 or 77.

2.10 Switch Logic of the Power Circuit Breakers

NOTE

For the description of the switch logics please refer to the chapter 4.6.1 "Circuit Breaker Logic" from
page 77. The synchronisation conditions apply as described in the chapter 2.7.1 "Synchronization
of the Generator Power Circuit Breakers" from page 26 and the chapter 2.7.3 "Synchronization of
the Mains Circuit Breakers" from page 28.

2.10.1 Switch Logic "PARALLEL" [NxPB]

NOTE

This switch logic must be selected for the following operating modes: isolated operation, isolated
operation in parallel with other gensets and operation in parallel with the mains.

In the event of a motor request


• the GCB is synchronised and closed and
• the required generator active load is adjusted (option B).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 31/153
Following the withdrawal of the motor request,
• the generator power is reduced,
• the GCB is opened and
• the genset is shut down after the coasting.

The mains power circuit breaker is synchronized and closed if


• terminal 53 "Release MCB" is set and
• GCB closed

NOTE

On bucking the unit (no F3 fault), power reduction is carried out before opening the generator
power circuit breaker.

2.10.2 Switch Logic "INTERCHANGE" [N2PB]


Interchange synchronization is activated via the "INTERCHANGE" screen input.

In the event of a motor request, a switch is made from mains to generator supply. In
order to achieve this,
• the GCB is synchronised and closed,
• the mains reference power "zero" is correspondingly adjusted and
• the MCB is opened.

After the motor request has been reset, a switch is made from generator to mains
supply. In order to achieve this,
• the MCB is synchronised and closed,
• the generator power "zero" is correspondingly adjusted and
• the GCB is opened.

2.10.3 Switch Logic "CLOSED TRANS."


Overlap synchronization is activated via the "CLOSED TRANS." screen input.

In the event of a motor request, a switch is made from mains to generator supply. In
order to achieve this,
• the GCB is synchronised and closed and
• the MCB is opened.

After the motor request has been reset, a switch is made from generator to mains
supply. In order to achieve this,
• the MCB is synchronised and closed and
• the GCB is opened.

NOTE

The power circuit breakers are opened regardless of the power.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 32/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
2.10.4 Switch Logic "CLOSED TRANS." [N2PB/NEB]
The changeover logic is activated via the "CLOSED TRANS." screen input.

In the event of a motor request, a switch is made from mains to generator supply. In
order to achieve this,
• the MCB is opened and
• the GCB is closed.

After the motor request has been reset, a switch is made from generator to mains
supply. In order to achieve this,
• the GCB is opened and
• the MCB is closed.

2.10.5 Switch Logic "EXTERNAL"


The external switch logic is activated via the "EXTERNAL" screen input. The entire
switch activation must be effected by a master controller (for instance by a PLC).
Closing and opening pulses sent to the MCB and the GCB are only output by this
controller, if the operating mode is set to "MANUAL". In the event of an error the cir-
cuit breakers are in any case opened by this controller.

2.11 Emergency Power Operation [N2PB/NEB]


Prerequisite The emergency power function can only be activated for synchronous generators by
means of the mask "emergency power operation ON". Emergency power is carried
out in "AUTOMATIC" or "TEST" operating mode regardless of the status of the digital
inputs "Automatic 1" and "Automatic 2".

NOTE

If the "Motor release" function is assigned to terminal 6, emergency power can be digitally
prevented or interrupted from an external source. Please also refer to the description in the
chapter 4.9.3 "Setting the Function of Terminal 6 " on page 98.

Activation of the emergency power operation If an error occurs at least at one of the terminals 50, 51 or 52 during
the activation of the input mask "emergency power delay time ON" the emergency
power is activated. A mains voltage fault is defined as follows: If the mains watch-
dogs are switched on, the limit values set there are used; otherwise, the limits are
internally defined as follows:

Mains watchdogs Voltage Frequency


ON Monitor values Monitor values
OFF Umains < 85 % Urated fmains < 90 % frated
Umains > 112 % Urated fmains > 110 % frated

Emergency power is also triggered via the detection of a switch fault when the MCB
is switched on. For the triggering to occur, the masks "emergency power" (page 79)
and "Monitoring MCB" must be set to "ON".

As a rule, the network masks apply for the NEB, since in this case, the mains watch-
dogs cannot be switched off.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 33/153
The following principles apply for the emergency power operation:

• If an emergency power operation is triggered, the genset is started in any case un-
less the process is interrupted by an error or by changing the operation mode.
• If the mains returns during the starting process, the MCB is not opened. The unit
starts under all circumstances, and waits without load until the mains settling time
has expired. If a further mains fault occurs during this time, the MCB is opened, and
the GCB is switched to the black busbar. The unit otherwise shuts off following the
expiry of the mains settling time.
• After reaching the black switch limits, the GCB is always closed, independent of the
motor delay time.
• If the mains returns during the emergency power operation (GCB closed) the mains
settling time is first finished before re-synchronising the MCB.

Emergency power operation In the case of an active emergency power operation the message "emergency
power" is displayed.

2.11.1 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "PARALLEL" [N2PB]


Emergency power operation Following the detection of an emergency power case, the emergency power delay is
first finished before starting the genset. On reaching the voltage and frequency limit
values, the MCB is opened, and the GCB is then switched to the black busbar. The
unit takes over the supply of the isolated network.

Return of the mains After the return of the mains voltage the mains settling time is still finished before the
device re-synchronises the mains circuit breaker. After closing the mains power cir-
cuit breaker, the unit assumes its original operating mode. If the generator is shut off,
power reduction is carried out provided that the active power controller is activated.

If the mains returns during starting, the mains power circuit breaker is not opened.
During the mains settling time, the unit operates without load, in order to enable the
immediate connection of the GCB in the event of further mains faults.

2.11.2 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "OPEN TRANS." [N2PB/NEB]
Emergency power operation Following the detection of an emergency power case, the emergency power delay
time is first finished before starting the genset. On reaching the voltage and fre-
quency limit values, the MCB is opened, and the GCB is then switched to the black
busbar. The unit takes over the supply of the isolated network.

Return of the mains After return of the mains voltage, the mains settling time is first finished, before the
mains circuit breaker is switched back by the device via a dead ("dark") busbar. If,
following the expiry of the mains settling time, an operating request is present, the
unit remains in isolated operation.

If the mains returns during starting, the mains power circuit breaker is not opened.
During the mains settling time, the unit operates without load, in order to enable the
immediate connection of the GCB in the event of further mains faults.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 34/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
2.11.3 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "CLOSED TRANS." [N2PB/NEB]
Emergency power operation Following the detection of an emergency power case the emergency power delay
time is first finished before starting the genset. On reaching the voltage and fre-
quency limit values, the MCB is opened, and the GCB is then switched to the black
busbar. The unit takes over the supply of the isolated network.

Return of the mains After the return of the mains voltage the mains settling time is first finished. If no
operating request is present, reverse synchronization of the MCB is carried out fol-
lowing the expiry of this time. Following the closure of the mains power circuit
breaker, the generator power circuit breaker is opened immediately and without any
reduction in power.

If the mains returns during starting, the mains power circuit breaker is not opened.
During the mains settling time, the unit operates without load, in order to enable the
immediate connection of the GCB in the event of further mains faults.

2.11.4 Emergency Power Operation for Switch Logic "INTERCHANGE" [N2PB]


Emergency power operation Following the detection of an emergency power case the emergency power delay
time is first finished before starting the genset. On reaching the voltage and fre-
quency limit values, the MCB is opened, and the GCB is then switched to the black
busbar. The unit takes over the supply of the isolated network.

Return of the mains After the return of the mains voltage the mains settling time is first finished. If no
operating request is present, reverse synchronization of the MCB is carried out fol-
lowing the expiry of this time. Following the closure of the mains power circuit
breaker, the generator power circuit breaker is opened following the reduction in
power.

If the mains returns whilst the unit is starting, the mains power circuit breaker is not
opened. During the mains settling time, the unit operates without load, in order to en-
able the immediate connection of the GCB in the event of further mains faults.

2.11.5 Emergency Power with "EXTERNAL" Switch Logic

ATTENTION

Emergency power in accordance with DIN VDE 0108 is not possible in this switch logic!

Emergency power operation Following the detection of an emergency power ase, the emergency power delay
time is first finished before starting the genset. On reaching the voltage and fre-
quency limit values, the MCB is opened, the GCB is not activated. The GCB and
the MCB are not otherwise operated. Not even following the return of the mains.

2.11.6 Emergency Power with Mains Power Circuit Breaker Malfunction


Mains power circuit breaker malfunction In the "AUTOMATIC" operating mode without a starting request, the control
system is set to emergency power standby. If the mains power circuit breaker is
tripped, the control system attempts to reactivate this. If this is not possible (due to an
MCB fault), the unit is started following the "MCB malfunction", emergency power
subsequently supplies the busbar. Only following the successful acknowledgment of
the "MCB malfunction" fault, is the MCB synchronized and the unit shut off again on
expiry of the mains settling time.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 35/153
2.12 Sprinkler Op eration

NOTE

The function "Sprinkler operation" must be assigned to terminal 6. Please also refer to the
description in the chapter 4.9.3 "Setting the Function of Terminal 6 " on page 98.

ATTENTION

Please note, that a High-signal must be applied to the terminal 6, in order to make sure that no
sprinkler operation is effected. With a Low-signal the controller receives the information that the
conditions for the sprinkler operation are given.

Æ Negative functional logic

Sprinkler "ON" If the signal drops out at the terminal 6, the sprinkler ON command is triggered. The
message "Sprinkler operation" is shown on the display. Up to 6 attempts are made to
start the unit (otherwise 3) if it is not yet in operation. All malfunctions which cause
shutoff become messages. Exception: terminal 61 and overspeed.

NOTE

The terminal 61 (error input) maintains the fault class it was adjusted to. It is advisable to assign the
EMERGENCY OFF here. Via the activation of "Sprinkler operation" (terminal 6), fault classes F2
and F3 are converted to fault class F1. (Exception: terminal 61 and overspeed).

Fault class F2 and fault class F3 → fault class F1

A distinction is made between three operating conditions:


M ains
1.) Mains circuit breaker closed
(mains voltage applied): MCB
• the genset is started, Busbar
• the GCB is not closed, or not opened.

GCB S prinkler
2.) Mains circuit breaker opened pum p
(mains voltage not applied):
• the GCB is closed or remains closed.

3.) Mains circuit breaker opened G M


(mains voltage applied):
• the MCB is synchronised,
• after the synchronization of one power circuit breaker, the other is opened.

Sprinkler "OFF" By connecting the sprinkler input, the sprinkler ON-command is reset, but the sprin-
kler operation is maintained. The message "Sprinkler coasting" appears. Sprinkler
operation is automatically terminated 10 minutes later. Earlier termination can be
achieved via the "STOP" operating mode. On operation, malfunctions which cause
shutoffs become active again.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 36/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
2.13 Direction of Power
If the unit's current transformers are wired according to the pin diagram shown, the
following values are displayed:

• Positive generator active load The generator supplies active load.

• Inductive generator-cos ϕ The generator is overexcited and supplies


inductive reactive power.

• Positive mains active load Active load is supplied to the mains.

• Inductive mains-cos ϕ The mains picks up inductive reactive power.

M A IN S

MCB
m a ins circu it brea ker

s 2 (l) S 2 (L )
P A c tiv e p o w e r
27 pos D is p la y p o s itiv e

R e a c tiv e p o w e r
28 Q
s 1 (k) S 1 (K ) in d D is p la y c a p a z itiv e

BUSBAR

AMG 2
AMG 3
GCB
ge ne rato r circu it breaker

s 2 (l) S 2 (L )
P A c tiv e p o w e r
25 pos D is p a ly p o s itiv e

R e a c tiv e p o w e r
26 Q
s 1 (k) S 1 (K ) in d D is p la y in d u c tiv e

G E N E R A TO R

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 37/153
2.14 Load and/or var Sharing [NxPB]
Control guarantees that, in every operating condition (operation in parallel with the
mains, isolated operation in parallel with other gensets or reverse synchronization of
the busbar to the mains), the active power (in reference to the relevant nominal load)
is evenly distributed over all gensets operating in parallel to the busbar.

Operation in parallel with the Each controller involved in distribution control influences the genset to which it is
mains with mains transfer assigned in such a manner that the active power set at the mains interchange point
regulation (main control variable) remains constant. All units are interlinked via a CAN bus, via
which any deviation in active power (generator power) can be determined for each
genset. This control variable is taken into consideration on controlling the inter-
change load. The weighting, with which the secondary and the main control vari-
able (= "reference variable") are processed, can be set via a factor. In controlled
state, the set active power flows at the mains interchange point, whereby the total
active power is subdivided equally amongst those gensets involved in distribution
control. If a constant power (F..fixed value) has been input as the setpoint value for
a genset, this is no longer involved in distribution control.

Isolated operation in parallel with Each controller involved in distribution control influences the genset to which it is
other gensets assigned in such a manner that the active power set at the mains interchange point
(main control variable) remains constant. All units are interlinked via a CAN bus, via
which any deviation in active power (generator power) can be determined for each
genset. This control variable is taken into consideration on controlling the fre-
quency. The weighting, with which the secondary and the main control variable
(= "reference variable") are processed, can be set via a factor. In controlled state,
the isolated system has the set rated frequency, whereby the total active power (in
reference to the relevant nominal power) is subdivided equally amongst those gen-
sets involved in distribution control.

Resynchronization of the busbar Distribution is carried out according to the type of isolated operation. The setpoint
to the mains value for the frequency is however calculated from the mains frequency (df max ×
0.5 + fmains, general synchronisation argument; 0.1 Hz). The relay outputs "Mains
power circuit breaker CLOSE" for all devices can be switched in parallel.

Prerequisites It is mandatory that the rated system frequencies (page 54), the add-on-/shutdwon
parameters (from page 77) and the power circuit breaker logics (page 77) are al-
ways adjusted to the same values for all devices of the distribution control system.

Description of the interface for the Distribution control is based on a multi-master-capable bus between the units. This
distribution control system structure enables the parallel operation of up to 8 gensets.

1. The bus length must not exceed 250 mtrs.


To guarantee a trouble-free op-
eration, please observe the fol- 2. Each end of the bus must be terminated with terminating resistors which corre-
lowing: spond to the wave impedance of the bus cable (approx. 120 Ω).
3. The structure of the bus must be linear. Dead-end feeders are not permissible.
4. Shielded "Twisted-Pair" are to be preferred as bus cables (example: Lappkabel
Unitronic LIYCY (TP) 2×2×0.25, UNITRONIC-Bus LD 2×2×0.22).
5. The bus cable must not be installed near power cables.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 38/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Wiring diagram

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
T erm in a l T erm in a l

C A N -L

C A N -L

C A N -L

C A N -L
T erm in a tion

T erm in a tion
C A N -H

GND

C A N -H

GND

C A N -H

C A N -H

GND
re s is ta n ce re s is ta n ce

N ote:
The term ination m ust be
effected w ith a resistor
w hich corresponds to the
w ave im pedance of the
used cable (e. g. 100 Ω )

CAN bus CAN bus CAN bus

2.14.1 Schematic R epresentation of the Load Sharing via the CAN-bus


Whether a genset is carrying out a load sharing and frequency control while in iso-
lated operation in parallel with other gensets, and to which extent, is determined by
the parameter "load sharing reference input value " which is expressed as a percent-
age value. See chapter 4.4.6 " Load and/or var sharing" on page 68of the operating
manual. In this case, 10 % means increased active power control, and 99 % in-
creased frequency control. This parameter must be input individually for each unit.

In the case of the following control system, it must be noted that each unit calculates
the mean utilization factor of all units from the data transmitted via the CAN bus, and
then compares this with its own utilization factor. The utilization factor is compared
with the reference variable, and results in the new reference variable. Frequency and
active power control are simultaneously carried out in these units (corresponding to
the reference variable).

Frequency control is carried out via the measured voltage/frequency of the voltage
system. The pickup is only used for monitoring functions.

f a c tu a l [H z ]

P a c tu a l [k W ]
f set

n a c tu a l [m in -1 ]
L e a d in g va lu e 1 0 ..9 9 [% ]

1 0 % = o nly P co n tro l
9 9 % = o nly f co n tro l
ΣP n o m in a l (v ia C A N )

P d iff [% ]
C a lcu la tio n

P a c tu a l [k W ]
P
ΣP a c tu a l (via C A N )
U tiliz a tio n fa c to r o f th is e n g in e [% ]
C a lcu la tio n
P n o m in a l [k W ] 2 0 0 1 -0 8 -0 6 L e is tu n g s ve rte ilu n g B lo c k s c h a ltb ild .s k f

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 39/153
2.15 Connection of External Components
2.15.1 Speed Gove rnor SG 2/SG 2D

NOTE

Please note the wiring diagram for the SG 2/SG 2D. The LeoPC 1 program is required for
parameterization of the speed governor.

T h ree -p osition con tro ller + 24 V D C 0 V DC S G 2 / S G 2D


C om m on 8 12 Com m on
H ighe r 9 10 H igh er
Low er 10 9 Lo w e r

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 40/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
2.16 Error
2.16.1 Error Classe s
The monitoring functions are divided into four error classes:

F0 Warning error This error does not cause an interruption of the operation. An output is made without
centralized alarm.
Æ Error text display
F1 Warning error This error does not cause an interruption of the operation. Output of the centralized
alarm.
Æ Error text + blinking LED "error" + relay centralized alarm (horn).
F2 Reacting error This error causes a shutoff of the driving genset. Prior to opening the GCB, the active
load is first reduced, followed by a coasting.
Æ Error text + blinking LED "error" + relay centralized alarm (horn) + settle.
F3 Reacting error This error causes an immediate opening of the power circuit breaker as well as the
shutdown of the driving genset.
Æ Error text + blinking LED "error" + relay centralized alarm (horn)+ switching-off.

NOTE

Via the activation of "Sprinkler operation" (terminal 6), fault classes F2 and F3 are converted to fault
class F1. Exception: terminal 61 and overspeed.

Error class F2 and error class F3 → Error class F1

2.16.2 Internally De tected Errors


List of faults determined internally depending on the variables which are monitored:

Type of error Error Error text Relay output


class (terminal)
Generator overspeed F3 Over speed
Generator overfrequency F3 over freq.
Generator underfrequency F3 low freque.
Generator overvoltage F3 G-Overvolt.
Generator undervoltage F3 G-.underv.
Generator overcurrent, step 1 F3 Gen.curr. 1
Generator overcurrent, step 2 F3 Gen.curr. 2
Reverse/reduced load F3 power fail
Monitoring of load unbalance F3 asymme.load
Overload (GCB is imm. opened, but with coasting) F2 G-Overload
Mains overvoltage F0 M-Overvolt.
Mains undervoltage F0 M-Undervolt
Mains overfrequency F0 M-Overfreq.
M-Underfrq. Centralized alarm
Mains underfrequency F0
Vectorjump via the
Mains vector jump F0
relay manager
Battery undervoltage F1 Bat.undervo
with the
GCB synchronization time monitoring F1 GCB syn.fai
parameter 85
MCB synchronization time monitoring F1 MCB syn.fai
Time monitoring of the GCB add-on F1 GCB failure
Time monitoring of the MCB add-on F1 MCB failure
Mechanical malfunction GCB F1 GCB failure
Mechanical malfunction MCB F1 MCB failure
Faulty reference power zero control with interchange F1 power zero
synchronization on GCB
Maintenance call F1 Service
Interface monitoring X1..X5 F1 error X1X5
Interface monitoring Y1..Y5 F1 error Y1Y5
Plausibility control pickup/generator monitoring F3 Pickup/fre.
Shutoff malfunction F3 stop fail
Start failure F3 Startfail

Note: In the event of mains faults, the GCB or the MCB is opened according to the setting, and is
closed again following the mains settling time.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 41/153
2.16.3 Acknowledg e Error

DANGER !!!

The unit may start unintentionally if a fault, which caused the unit to shut down, is acknowledged
and a release is still present. Before acknowledging the fault, check the cause of the fault, in order
to protect operating personnel located in the vicinity of the system against injuries, and to protect
the motor against unintentional destruction.
⇒ In the event of an error whose cause is not or not clearly detectable, NEVER press the
acknowledgement button! The destruction of the motor cannot otherwise be ruled out !

By pressing the button "QUIT" the output of the centralized alarm and the error mes-
sages are acknowledged on the LC-display according to the following logic :

NOTE

In order to acknowledge fault messages via terminal 6, the "Acknowledgment" function must be
assigned to this terminal. Please also read the description in the chapter 4.9.3 "Setting the Function
of Terminal 6 " on the page 98.

Terminal 6 If a continuous HIGH-level is present at the terminal 6, and an error is also active,
paging of the indication of the operating state is only possible while in the operating
mode "STOP".

Horn After 2 minutes, the horn is reset, independent of the acknowledgement of an error.

Interface All errors are transmitted via the interface.

a.) Brief Acknowledgement (< 2.5 s)

Description The button "clear" is pressed for 0.5 s < t < 2.5 s or
the terminal 6 is set for 0.5 s < t < 2.5 s or
the acknowledgement bit via the interface is set for 0.5 s < t < 2.5 s.

Result - Steady light of the LED "alarm".

Acknowledgement via operating mode


button "clear" Terminal 6 Interface STOP AUTO TEST MANUAL
1 x x 1 1 1 1
0 1 x 1 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 0
x..no meaning

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 42/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
b.) Long Acknowledgement (>2.5 s)

Description The button "clear" is pressed for t > 2.5 s


the terminal 6 is set for t > 2.5 s
the acknowledgment bit via the interface is set for t > 2.5 s.

Result - The LED "alarm" goes out,


- the relays centralized alarm F1 and F3 are reset and
- the display messages are acknowledged.

Table for warning errors Acknowledgement via Operating mode


(error classes 0 and 1), But. "clear" Terminal 6 Interface STOP AUTO TEST MANUAL
if no error fo the error class 2 or 3 is 1 x x 1 1 1 1
present 0 1 x 1 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 0
x..no meaning

Table for shutdown errors Acknowledgement via Operating mode


( Error classes 2 and 3) But. "clear" Terminal 6 Interface STOP AUTO TEST MANUAL
1 x x 1 0 0 1
0 1 x 1 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 0
x..no meaning

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 43/153
3 Display and Operation Components

3.1 Front Memb rane


The pressure-sensitive membrane of the front panel consists of a plastic coating. All
keys have been designed as touch-sensitive membrane switch elements. The display
is an LC display, consisting of 2x16 characters, with indirect green lighting. The con-
trast of the display can be infinitely adjusted via a rotary potentiometer positioned on
the left. The parameterization bushing is located on the left side of the unit. Please
connect the direct parameterization cable (DPC) there.

[N2PB / NEB] L eon ha rd-R eg le rba u


Stuttga rt
1 V1 V / kV A (L1) A (L2) A (L3) 16
2 V2
26 10
V3
3 ON OFF 17
Hz reversible display
4
alarm m essage display V clear
13 14 15
5 ON OFF 19
protection
select digit cursor 11
29 18
STAR T STOP 21
12
20
6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25

[N1PB] L eon ha rd-R eg le rba u


Stuttga rt
1 V1 V / kV A (L1) A (L2) A (L3)

2 V2
26 10
m ains parallel
V3
3
Hz reversible display
4
alarm m essage display V clear
13 14 15
5 ON OFF 19
protection
select digit cursor 11
29 18
STAR T STOP 21
12
20
6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 44/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
3.1.1 Brief Descrip tion of the Light-Emitting Diodes and Buttons
_______________________ Light emitting diodes ___________________________________ Buttons

1 "U1" ....................................................... voltage L1 13 "message↓" ..................... advance of the message


2 "U2" ....................................................... voltage L2 13 "Selection"................................... confirm selection
1 "U3" ....................................................... voltage L3 14 "display U↓"........................ advance of the display
4 "alarm" .............................fault message is present 14 "digit↑"............................................... increase digit
5 "protection" ..................................monitoring active 15 "clear"....................... acknowledge fault messages
6 "AUTO ....operating mode "AUTOMATIC" selected 15 "position→"........... shift input position 1 to the right
7 "TEST"................operating mode "TEST" selected 16 "MCB ON" .........................Mains-CB manually ON
8 "STOP" .............. operating mode "STOP" selected 17 "MCB OFF" ..................... Mains CB manually OFF
9 "MAN" ........... operating mode "MANUAL" selected 18 "GCB ON" ...................generator-CB manually ON
10 "MCB ON"............................response MCB closed 19 "GCB OFF"................ generator CB manually OFF
1 "GCB ON"............................response GCB closed 20 "START" ............................... start genset manually
12 "Genset rotating" 21
"STOP" ................................. stop genset manually
22
"AUTO"...... Activate operating mode AUTOMATIC
Display 23
"TEST" .................. Activate operating mode TEST
26 "LC-display" LC-display 24
"STOP" ...........................stop genset automatically
29 "Bushing" Parameterisation bushing 25
"MANUAL"....... Activate operating mode MANUAL

3.1.2 Overview of the Functions of the Buttonn

Operating mode Automatic


Engine GCB MCB
clear
STO P MAN AU TO TES T STO P ON OFF ON OFF

annun- display clear STOP MAN AUTO TEST START STOP ON OFF ON OFF
ciation
MANUAL
Start engine 1st 2nd
Stop engine 1st 2nd
GCB close 1st 2nd
GCB open 1st 2nd
MCB close 1st 2nd
MCB open 1st 2nd
AUTOMATIC
Start engine and DI or operating mode 1st
Stop engine and DI or operating mode Yes 1st
GCB close and DI or operating mode 1st
GCB open and DI or operating mode 1st
MCB close and DI or operating mode 1st
MCB open and DI or operating mode 1st
TEST 1st
Start engine 1st
Start load test 1st 2nd
Terminate load test 1st
Terminate load test (de- 1st
pending on type of switch)
STOP 1st
Operating mode "Parameterize"

Select Digit Cursor

Start parameterization 1st 1st


Confirm input/next mask 1st
Previous mask 1st 1st
Next pos./change text 1st
Increase position 1st
End parameterization 1st 1st

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 45/153
3.2 Light-Emittin g Diodes
Lamp test The LEDs may be checked by means of a lamp test. To do so, please press the
button 13 "message↓" and repeat pressing the button until the display "00.0 LED-
TEST " appears in the bottom line of the display. Then press the button
14 "display V↓". All LEDs are lighting up now. The LEDs 6 "AUTO", 7 "TEST" and
8 "STOP" and 9 "MANUAL" light up one after the other.

1 2 1 ............................ LED Voltage control color "GREEN"


"U1 .. U2 .. U3"
The light-emitting diodes 1 "U1", 2 "U2" and 1 "U3" indicate which voltage (UL1N,
UL2N, UL3N, UL12, UL23 or UL31) is currently indicated. This applies both to the genera-
tor and the rated voltage display.

4 ......................................... LED Alarm color "RED"


"alarm"
If the LED 4 "alarm" lights up, the device has detected an error which is processed
according to the its error class. The message and the type of fault are shown on the
LC display. If this LED flashes, a new fault has occurred within the last two minutes.
Via brief acknowledgment, this switches to continuous illumination, and the central-
ized alarm (horn) is ceased.

5 ......................................... LED Engine monitoring color "GREEN"


"protection"
If the LED 5 "protection" lights up, the engine monitoring is active, i. e. in addition to
the permanently monitored error inputs, the error inputs with delayed programming
are also monitored. Generator underspeed, undervoltage and reverse power are
also monitored.

6 ......................................... LED Operating mode "AUTOMATIC" color "GREEN"


"AUTO"
If the LED is lighting 6 , the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" aktive.

7 ......................................... LED Operating mode "TEST color "YELLOW"


"TEST"
If the LED is lighting 7 , the operating mode "TEST" is active.

8 ......................................... LED Operating mode "STOP" Color "RED"


"STOP"
If the LED 8 is lighting, the operating mode "STOP" is selected.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 46/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
9 ......................................... LED Operating mode "MANUAL" color "GREEN"
"MAN"
If the LED 9 is lighting, the operating mode "MANUAL" is active. The operating but-
tons 16 , 17 , 18 and 19 (direct control of the power circuit breakers) and the buttons 20
and 21 (Start-Stop-direct control of the genset) are active.

10 ......................................... LED Mains circuit breaker ON / parallel with mains color "GREEN"
[N2PB/NEB] "MCB ON"
[N1PB] "parallel with mains" [N2PB/NEB] .. Devices with two power circuit breakers: Die LED 10 "mains - CB ON"
indicates that the mains circuit breaker is closed.
[N1PB] .......... Devices equipped with a power circuit breaker or devices which have
become a 1-LS-device due to external wiring [see chapter 2.1.2 "...
equipments with one power circuit breaker" on page 15): The LED
10 "parallel with mains" indicates that the device is operating in paral-

lel with the mains befindet.

1 ......................................... LED Generator power circuit breaker ON color "GREEN"


"GCB ON"
The LED 1 "Gen - CB ON" indicates that the generator power circuit breaker is
closed.

12 ......................................... LED Operating condition "genset / engine rotating" color "GREEN"


"genset is rotating"
If this LED is blinking, the ignition speed has been exceeded. As soon as the speed
reaches the frequency baud, i.e.±3 % of the preset rated frequency, the LED lights
with steady light.

3.3 Button
3.3.1 Display Tou ch
In order to facilitate the setting of the parameters, the buttons have an AUTOROLL
function. It allows to switch to the next setting and parameterizing screens, the digits,
or the cursor position. The AUTOROLL function will only be activated when the user
depresses the corresponding keys for a certain period of time.

13 ..................................BUTTON Message↓..Select color "NONE"


"message↓ ↓..select"
Normal operation . 13 "message↓" - Pressing this button causes an advance of the
display of the operating and error messages.
Parameterization .. 13 "select" - Jumps to the next input mask. If the value which
was originally displayed has been changed by pressing the but-
tons 14 "digit↑" or 15 "cursor→" the newly adjusted value is
stored by pressing the button 13 "Selection" once. By pressing
this button again, the user causes the system to display the next
entry screen.

14 ..................................BUTTON Display U↓..Digit↑ color "NONE"


"display V↓ ↓..digit↑
↑"
Normal operation . 14 "display V↓" - Pressing this button causes an advance of the
display of the generator and mains frequency display.
Note:
If this button is being pressed for at least 5 seconds, the counter
which is currently displayed is reset (only on code level 2).
Parameterization .. 14 "digit↑" - With this button, the position at which the cursor is
currently pointing is increased by one digit.The increase is re-
stricted by the admissible limits (see list of parameters included
in the Annex). In case the maximum number is reached which
can be set, the number automatically returns to the lowest ad-
missible number.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 47/153
DANGER !!!

The unit may start unintentionally if a fault, which caused the unit to shut down, is acknowledged
and a release is still present. Before acknowledging the fault, check the cause of the fault, in order
to protect operating personnel located in the vicinity of the system against injuries, and to protect
the motor against unintentional destruction.
⇒ NEVER press the acknowledgement button, if the cause of the error cannot or not clearly be
detected! The destruction of the engine cannot otherwise be ruled out !

15 ..................................BUTTON Acknowledgement..Cursor → color "NONE"


"clear..cursor→ →"
Normal operation . 15 "clear" - With this button, error messages are acknowledged,
i.e. the error displays on the LC-display disappear and the LED
"alarm" goes out. The operating variable display is set on the
basic screen. Fault class F2 and F3 faults can only be acknowl-
edged in the "STOP" and "MANUAL" operating modes.
Parameterization .. 15 "cursor→" - with this button, the cursor is shifted one position
to the right. When the last right-hand position is reached, the
cursor automatically moves to the first position left-hand of the
value to be entered.

3.3.2 Operation o f the Power Circuit Breakers


16 17...........................BUTTON Mains-CB "ON / OFF" color "RED / GREEN"
[N2PB/NEB] "MCB ON/OFF"
(only released, if the manual operation ( button 25 "MANUAL") or the test operation
"button 23 "TEST") have been selected).
Button 16 "MCB ON" Depending on the preset circuit breaker logic, the closing of
the PCB is released by pressing the button 16 "PCB ON". This
process can be aborted if the "MCB OFF" or "GCB ON" button is
actuated or the operating mode is changed.
Button 17 "PCB OFF" By pressing the button 17 "PCB OFF"the mains circuit
breaker can be opened, or a synchronization of the MCB can be
aborted (depending on the logic of the power circuit breaker).

18 19 ...........................BUTTON Generator-CB "ON / OFF" color "RED / GREEN"


"GCB ON/OFF"
(only released, if the manual operation (button 25 "MANUAL") or the test operation
"button 23 "TEST") have been selected).
Button 18 "GCB ON" Depending on the preset circuit breaker logig, the closing of
the GCB is released by pressing the button 18 " ON. This proc-
ess can be aborted if the "GCB OFF" or "MCB ON" button is
actuated or the operating mode is changed.
Button 19 "GCB OFF" By pressing the button 19 "GCB OFF" the generator power
circuit breaker can be opened, or a synchronisation of the MCB
can be aborted. (depending on the logic of the power circuit
breaker).

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 48/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
3.3.3 Selector Sw itch for Operating Modes
20
.. 21 ........................ BUTTONS Operating mode engine "Start / Stop" color "GREEN / RED"
"Manual START / STOP"
START ...................By pressing the button, the genset is started.The starter and the
[only possible while in operating relay are activated by pressing the button. After
operating mode MANUAL]
reaching the ignition speed, the starter is deactivated, while the
operating relay remains picked up. The button can now be re-
leased.
STOP .....................With this button, the genset is stopped by resetting back the op-
erating relay. There is no coasting.

22
..................................BUTTON Operating mode "AUTOMATIC" color "NONE"
"AUTO"
"AUTO" .................The genset is automatically started and stopped, and the power
circuit breaker are activated automatically. The two control inputs
"Automatic 1" and "Automatic 2" are used to specify various
modes in "AUTOMATIC" operating mode (also see description of
control inputs). Emergency power and sprinkler operation is car-
ried out regardless of the status of the digital inputs "Auto-
matic 1" and "Automatic 2".
• Digital input "Automatic 1" set
The setpoint value of the active load 1 is adjusted.
• Digital input "Automatic 2" set
The sepoint value of the active load 2, or an external setpoint value via
the interface, is adjusted (selectable while in parameterization mode).

23
..................................BUTTON Operating mode "TEST" color "WHITE"
"TEST"
"TEST" ..................By pressing the button 23 "TEST" the genset is started, the en-
gine monitoring is activated, and the power circuit breakes are
not operated. This is carried out in the event of mains failure and
when emergency power is switched on.
[NxPB] Start of a "LOAD TEST" By pressing the button "GCB ON" a load test is
made possible. In addition to the "TEST" mode functions, the
GCB is synchronized.
[NxPB] Termination of a "LOAD TEST" The "LOAD TEST" can be terminated after
pressing the button "GCB open" or. "MCB ON" (depending on
the logic of the circuit breaker). In "STOP" or "AUTOMATIC"
automatic mode without request signal, the unit is bucked with a
reduction in power.

24
..................................BUTTON Operating mode "STOP" color "RED"
"STOP"
"STOP"..................By selecting the operating mode "STOP" the genset is stopped
in any case. The shutdown process is as follows:
Shutdown procedure:
• The operating mode "STOP" is selected,
• the active load is reduced,
• the GCB is opened when reaching 3 % of the rated active load
of the generator,
• a coasting to cool down the genset is carried out according to
the preset parameters.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 49/153
25
..................................BUTTON Operating mode "MANUAL" color "NONE"
"MAN"
"MAN" ...................With the operating mode "MANUAL" the buttons 16 , 18 , 19 , 20
and 21 are activated to control the equipment manually. The
automatic control of the power circuit breakers and the unit is
blocked. Important automatic processes remain in operation
(e. g. engine monitoring and the mains monitoring function for
the operation in parallel with the mains). Sprinkler and emer-
gency power operation are not active.

3.4 Display
26
................................. DISPLAY LC-display
"LC-display"
The LC-display marked 26 outputs the corresponding messages and values, de-
pending on the operating mode which is currently activated. In parameterization
mode, the individual parameters are displayed and changed. While in automatic
mode, the performance quantities (e. g. voltagea and currents) can be retrieved.

Top line • In the field "V/kV" the generator voltage is indicated in dependence of the light-
emitting diodes U1, U2 and U3.
• In the fields "A(L1)", "A(L2)"and "A(L3)" the generator wire currents are separately
indicated for each phase.

Bottom line In the field "Operting and fault messages" the following masks appear:

Basic indication mask


• Display of the generator-cos ϕ and the generator active load
or
• the current action of the device (synchronization, starting, etc.)

Subordinate screen mask: Depending on the unit's equipment,


• the engine speed,
• the mains voltage,
• the mains voltage/mains performance [NxPB],
• the mains cos ϕ,
• the analog input quantities,
• the generator active energy,
• the running hours,
• the remaining time until the maintenance call,
• the genset starting counter,
• the battery voltage (supply voltage),
• the number of subscribers of the load sharing [N2PB or option W/O],
• the maximum generator current (slave pointer)
• the last four fault messages
are displayed.

These masks are displayed one after the other by pressing the button
13 "message↓". When the last display screen has been reached, the basic screen is

displayed. If faults have occurred, their message texts are displayed in the sequence
of their occurrence in the display screens before the basic screen. Only the first
4 errors are indicated. All subsequent errors are no longer indicated, however nor-
mally processed. If any functions of the device are active (e.g. synchronisation of the
GCB), the basic display mask is superimposed by the corresponding message (e.g.
"Synchronous. synchronization"). Following the termination of the unit function, the
basic mask is displayed again.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 50/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4 Parameteriz ation Masks (Input of Parameters)

While in input mode (simultaneous depression of 13 "digit↑" and 14 "position→"),


stepping through the parameterization mask is possible by pressing 12 "Selection".
Depressing the button 12 "Selection" for a certain period of time activates the scroll-
ing function, and the displays are rapidly stepped through. By simultaneously de-
pressing the buttons 12 "Selection" and 14 "Position→" you can step backwards
through the last four parameterization masks. Exception: The service routine and
jumping from the last into the first mask. If for a period of time of 60 seconds no input,
modification or any action was made out, the device goes automatically back to the
automatic mode.

NOTE

There are two different hardware versions, both of which are described in this operating manual: A
100 V-version [1] and a 400 V-version [4]. The two versions vary as far as the parameterization
masks, the input of the parameters and the setting limits are concerned The two types are
differentiated by putting their respective voltage values first ([1]... or [4]...).

software version Software version


Vx.xxxx Display of the software version.

4.1 Service Disp lay

Service-Display Service display ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The subsequent three masks are displayed, i. e, the voltages and fre-
quencies of the busbar, the mains and the generator are indicated. Addi-
tionally, the governor outputs and the circuit states of the power circuit
breakers during the synchronization, are also indicated. Depending on
the hardware used (with/without voltage transducer) different masks are
displayed.
OFF.......... The service masks are not displayed.

4.1.1 Service Disp lay for the Version Without Voltage Transducer (400 V)
Mask for synchron. gen. Double voltage and double frequency display
Sam0000V 00.00Hz The generator and busbar voltages and frequencies are indicated. The phase posi-
Gen0000V 00,00Hz tion between generator and busbar is indicated by the synchroscope (LED-strap,
Mask for asynchron. gen. marked 5 ):
Sam .............. Busbar voltage and frequency
Remanenz 00.00Hz Gen............... Generator voltage and frequency
Gen:000V 00.00Hz Remanence.. Frequency of the remanent voltage (only for asynchronous genera-
tors)

Mask for synchron. gen. Double voltage and double frequency display
Net0000V 00.00Hz The mains and busbar voltages and frequencies are indicated -. The phase position
Sam0000V 00.00Hz between mains and busbar is indicated by the synchroscope (LED-strap, marked
5 ):
Mask for asynchron. gen.
Net ................ Mains voltage and frequency
Net0000V 00.00Hz Sam .............. Busbar voltage and frequency
Remanenz 00.00Hz Remanence.. Frequency of the remanent voltage (only for asynchronous genera-
tors)

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 51/153
4.1.2 Service Disp lay for the Version with a Voltage Transducer (100 V)

S 00,0kV 00.00Hz Double voltage and double frequency display


G 00,0kV 00.00Hz The generator and busbar voltages and frequencies are indicated. The phase posi-
[for primary values > 800 V; tion between generator and busbar is indicated by the synchroscope (LED-strap,
otherwise as for 400 V] marked 5 ):
S .............. Busbar voltage and frequency
G .............. Generator voltage and –frequency

N 00,0kV 00.00Hz Double voltage and double frequency display


S 00,0kV 00.00Hz The mains and busbar voltages and frequencies are indicated. The phase position
[for primary values > 800 V; between mains and busbar is indicated by the synchroscope (LED-strap, marked
otherwise as for 400 V] 5 ):

N .............. Mains voltage and frequency


S .............. Busbar voltage and frequency

4.1.3 Status of the Circuit Breakers and Relays during Synchronization

Rel.: MCB States of controller power circuit breakers and relays


f U GCB The current relay status of the governor outputs, as well as the signals transmitted to
the power circuit breakers during the synchronization or add-on, are indicated:

While in solated operation (in parallel with other gensets), the following applies:
f................ + frequency controller higher terminal 8/9
- frequency controller lower terminal 8/10
U .............. + voltage controller higher terminal 11/12
- voltage controller lower terminal 11/13
While in operation in parallel with the mains, the following applies:
f................ + performance higher terminal 8/9
- performance lower terminal 8/10
U .............. + cosphi higher (excitation) terminal 11/12
- cosphi lower (de-excitation) terminal 11/13

MCB......... Closed add-on pulse of the MCB terminal 16/17


Open opening pulse of the MCB terminal 39/40
GCB ......... Closed add-on pulse of the GCB terminal 14/15
Open opening pulse of the GCB terminal 41/42

4.2 Configuratio n of the Password Protection


The device is equipped with a three-level code and parameterization hierarchy al-
lowing to make different parameterization masks visible for different users. A differ-
ence is made between:

Code level 0 User: Third party


(CS0) This code level does not allow any access to the parameters. The input function is
locked.

Code level 1 User: Client


(CS1) This code level authorizes the user to change a few preselected parameters (e. g. set
active load etc.). Changing the password is not possible on this level.

Code level 2 User: Engineer


(CS2) With this code level 2 the user obtains all access rights and can therefore access all
parameters directly (viewing and changing) Moreover, the user can set the password
for levels 1 and 2.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 52/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
NOTE

Once the code level has been set, it will remain unchanged, even after repeatedly entering the
parameterization mode. In the event that a wrong code number was entered, the code levels is set
to CS0, thus locking the device for third party users (Input of the passwords on page 56). Two
hours after the last operation, the device automatically goes to code level CS0. By entering the
appropriate code number, you'll go back to the corresponding level.

enter code Entering the code number 0..9999


number 0000 When entering the parameterization mode, the code number is requested first, then
the different users are identified. The number indicated XXXX is a random number
(ZU) to be confirmed with the button 12 "Selection". If the random number was con-
firmed without a changing by 12 "Selection", the code level of the device remains un-
changed. In order to change the code level and to assign new code words to the us-
ers, there are two four-digit code numbers (0000..9999). For the user level "Third
Party" no assignment is necessary, since normally, the user does not obtain any ac-
cess to the parameterization level (protected by the code).

4.3 Configuration of the Basic Settings

Configure Configurate basic settings YES/NO


Base ? YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 13 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 15 "Position →", 14 "Digit ↑" or 13 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

WARNING !

An incorrect input may lead to incorrect measuring values and therefore destroy the generator!

Generator-number Generator number 1..8


0 If there are several generators linked via a bus connection, a different number must
be assigned to each generator. The generator number 1 should even be assigned to
gensets that are running individually.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 53/153
4.3.1 Parameteriz ation via the Side Connector (Direct Parameterization)

NOTE

For the parameterization via the side connector (direct parameterization), you need a direct
parameterization cable (order code "DPC"), the program LeoPC 1 (supplied with the cable) and the
corresponding configuration files. Please consult the online help installed when the program is
installed for a description of the LeoPC 1 PC program and its setup.

Remote parameterization For the remote parameterization, the level-two password parameterized at the device
itself must be entered via the parameter "Password level 2",otherwise the values may
only be read but not written. The input via the bus has no effect on the masks dis-
played; which means that, if the device itself is set to code level 0, it will react as de-
scribed above. The only parameterization allowed is via the bus. The parameteriza-
tion via the bus is enabled for 10 minutes following the time moment from which the
parameterization or reading are stopped, afterwards, the password must be param-
eterized again. To load the language, the password must also be entered first. If the
code for the level 2 is entered at the device itself, the parameterization via the bus is
automatically enabled.

WARNING !

If the subsequent parameter "Direct parameter." is set to "ON", the communication with the
terminals X1..X5 via the interface is locked. If the communication via the interface X1..X5 is to be
re-established after the parameterization of the device (e. g. CAN-bus-link via a gateway GW 4), it
is necessary that the subsequent parameter is set to "NO" !
For safety reasons, the direct parameterization is switched off after reaching the ignition speed.
This means, that any further settings of the device parameters are only possible directly via the
display buttons or via the CAN-bus-interface (option Sf). The masks is set from YES to NO (by
means of the software). The mask is then removed and is only displayed again after the ignition
speed is fallen below. The de-activation of the direct parameterization is a safety measure, to
prevent a simultaneous black switching of the generator switches when multiple equipments are
started simultenously (e. g. emergency power request).

load conf.direct Parameterization via the parameterization connector YES/NO


YES YES.......... Parameterization via the side connector is possible, and a CAN-bus-link
which may be established via the terminals X1..X5, is de-activated. The
following conditions must be given for the parameterization via the side
connector:
- a connection must be established between the device and the PC via
the direct parameterization cable,
- the baudrate of the program LeoPC must be set to 9,600 Baud and
- the corresponding parameteization file must be used (file name:
"xxxxxxxp.asm").
NO ........... Parameterization via the side connector is not possible, and a CAN-bus-
link which may be established via the terminals X1..X5, is activated.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 54/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.3.2 Generator- a nd Network Configuration

Generator freq. Generator setpoint frequency 40.0..70.0 Hz


f set = 00.0Hz The generator setpoint frequency is entered in this mask. It is required for the fre-
quency controller while in isolated and no-load operation. In most cases, 50 Hz or
60 Hz will be entered in this mask. Other values are possible, of course.

Rated frequency Rated system frequency 50.0/60.0 Hz


generator 00.0Hz The rated system frequency is transmitted to the device. this parameter depends on
the three-phase voltage system of each country and refers to the internal limiting
values for the mains failure recognition with the mains monitors switched off [NxPB].

Gen.volt.transf. Voltage transformer generator volt., second. [1] 50..125 V; [4] 200..440 V
secondary 000V The secondary voltage is set here in V. This serves as an indication of the secon-
dary voltages on the display.

Gen.volt.transf. Volt. transf. generator volt., prim. [1] 0.050..65.000 kV; [4] 0.200..65.000 kV
primary 00.000kV The primary voltage is set here in V. This serves as an indication of the primary volt-
ages on the display.For measuring voltages of 100 V without the use of a measuring
transducer, 0.1 kV must be set here; for 400 V = 0.4 kV.

Bus.volt.transf. Voltage transformer generator volt., second. [1] 50..125 V; [4] 200..440 V
secondary 000V The secondary voltage is set here in V. This serves as an indication of the secon-
dary voltages on the display.

Bus.volt.transf. Volt. transf. Busbar voltage, prim. [1] 0.050..65.000 kV; [4] 0.200..65.000 kV
primary 00.000kV The primary voltage is set here in V. This serves as an indication of the primary volt-
ages on the display.For measuring voltages of 100 V without the use of a measuring
transducer, 0.1 kV must be selected here; for 400 V = 0.4 kV.

mains volt.trans Voltage transformer mains voltage, secondary [1] 50..125 V; [4] 200..440 V
secondary 000V The secondary voltage is set here in V. This serves as an indication of the secon-
dary voltages on the display.

mains volt.trans Volt. transf. mains volt. primary [1] 0.050..65.000 kV, [4] 0.200..65.000 kV
primary 00.000kV The primary voltage is set here in V. This serves as an indication of the primary volt-
ages on the display.For measuring voltages of 100 V without the use of a measuring
transducer, 0.1 kV must be selected here; for 400 V = 0.4 kV.

Gen. voltage Generator setpoint voltage [1] 25..140 V; [4] 50..500 V


U set 000V This value of the voltage specifies the setpoint of the generator voltage for no-load
and isolated operation.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 55/153
4.3.3 Transformer and Measuring Quantities

Current transf. Current transformer generator 10..7,000/x A


Generator 0000/1 For the indication and regulation of the current value, it is necessary to enter the cur-
rent transducer ratio. The ratio must be selected in a manner to ensure that at
maximum performance, at least 60 % of the transformer rated current are flowing.
Lower percentage values may lead to malfunctions. Moreover, additional inaccura-
cies do occur with the regulation and monitoring functions.

{X} / 1 A ... Secondary rated current = 1 A at primary rated current = {X} A;


{X} / 5 A ... Secondary rated current = 5 A at primary rated current = {X} A;
{X}............ e. g. from the main series 10, 15, 20, 30, 50 or 75 A as well as the deci-
mal fractions and their multiples, or the corresponding secondary series
with 12.5, 25, 40 or 60 A.

Rated current Generator rated curren 10..7,000 A


Gen. 0000A By entering the value in this mask, the generator rated current is preset. An exact
input of the generator rated current is mandatory since many monitoring functions
refer to this value.

Power measuring Power measurement generator singlephase/threephase


Gen. threephase The power measurement of the generator performance can be selected either single
or three-phased. If selecting the "single-phase power measurement" the current and
the voltage of the phase L1 are taken into account for the power measurement. If
selecting the "three-phased power measurement" the currents and voltages of all
three phases are taken into account for the power measurement.

Rated power Generator rated power [1] 5..9,999 kW; [4] 5..6,900 kW
Gen. 0000kW By entering the value in this mask, the generator rated current is preset. An exact
input of the generator rated current is mandatory since many measurements, regu-
lations and monitoring functions refer to this value.

4.3.4 Mains Curre nt-/Mains Power Measurement


The two following chapters "Measurement of the Mains Power via a Mains Power
Transformer" and "Mains Power Measurement via Analog Input (Option In20)" are
displayed alternatively and according to the measurement. If no measurement of the
mains power was requested via a 0/4..20 mA-analog input, the measurement is al-
ways effected via a power transformer.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 56/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
a.) Measurement of the Mains Power via a Mains Power Transformer

Current transf. Current transformer mains (terminal 27/28) 10..7,000/x A


Mains 0000/1 For the indication and regulation of the current value, it is necessary to enter the cur-
rent transducer ratio. The ratio must be selected in a manner to ensure that at
maximum performance, at least 60 % of the transformer rated current are flowing.
Lower percentage values may lead to malfunctions. Moreover, additional inaccura-
cies do occur at the regulation and monitoring functions.

{X} / 1 A Secondary rated current = 1 A at primary rated current = {X} A;


{X} / 5 A Secondary rated current = 5 A at primary rated current = {X} A;
{X} e. g. from the main series 10, 15, 20, 30, 50 or 75 A as well as the
decimal fractions and their multiples, or the corresponding secondary
series with 12.5, 25, 40 or 60 A.

b.) Mains Power Measurement via Analog Input (Option In20)

analog in Pmains Analog input P mains (terminal 27/28) 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA


0-20mA The measuring ranges 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA are selected in this mask.
analog in Pmains
4-20mA

analog in Pmains Mains active load 0/4 mA [1] 0..+/-9.99 kW; [4] 0..+/-6.9 kW
0% 0000kW A numerical value corresponding to the lowest input value, is assigned to the scale-
able analog input. Æ The determination of the lower value (0 % corresponds f. i. to
-500 kW,) with a minimum pick-up factor of the analog input (0 or 4 mA respectively)
["+" = export; "-" = import].

analog in Pmains Mains active load 20/mA [1] 0..+/-9.99 kW; [4] 0..+/-6.9 kW
100% 0000kW A numerical value corresponding to the highest input value, is assigned to the scale-
able analog input. Æ The determination of the upper value (100 % corresponds f. i.
to 500 kW,) with a maximum pick-up factor of the analog input (20 or mA )
["+" = export; "-" = import].

NOTE

Make sure that the sepoint value of the imported/exported supply is approx. in the middle of the
measuring range. This way, the control volume can be fully used.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 57/153
4.3.5 Changing P asswords

NOTE

Once the code level has been set, it remains unchanged after repeatedly entering the
parameterization mode. In the event that a wrong code number was entered, the code level is set to
CS0, thus locking the device for third party users.
If supply voltage is applied for 2 hours without interruption, the device goes automatically back to
code level 0.

Define level 1 Code level 1 (client) 0..9999


code 0000 This mask appears only after entering code level 2. After the input of the digits in this
mask, the code level for level 1 (client) is set. After entering his code, the client only
has the access rights which were assigned to him.
This code level (CS) is preset to CS1 = 0 0 0 1

Define level 2 Code level 2 (commissioning) 0..9999


code 0000 This mask appears only after entering code level 2. After the input of the digits in this
mask, the code level for level 2 (commissioning engineer) is set. After entering his
code, the engineer has the access rights which were assigned to him.
This code level (CS) is preset to CS2 = 0 0 0 2

4.4 Controller C onfiguration

WARNING !

An incorrect input may lead to uncontrollable governor action and may destroy the generator!

Configure Configuration of the governors YES/NO


Contr. ? YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not.
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can also be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or
12 "Selection"). No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters

are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 58/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.4.1 Voltage Stab ilizer and Import/Export Power Control [NxPB]
These masks do only appear if the active load controller is set to "ON" (see chap-
ter 4.4.3 "Transformer and Measuring Quantities" on page 63).

NOTE

For the set value power control the transfer point to the mains is not considered, which means that,
in the event of excess power, power is exported to the mains, whereas, in the event of a power
deficit, the power difference is imported from the mains.

Power controller Setpoint value 1 active load controller B/L/F 0..3,000 kW


P set1 B0000kW The setpoint value 1 is active if the AutomatiC 1 (voltage applied to terminal 3) is
released. The mains interchange power is then adjusted to the preset value.
The active load is adjusted to the preset value.
F............... The letter F stands for sepoint value control (= constant power). This
means that the generator always supplies a constant active power value.
Following the activation of a setpoint value control, the genset is always
started.
The mains interchange power is then adjusted to the preset value.
B .............. The letter B stands for the imported power. This means, that the power
which was preset here is always imported from the mains, with the mini-
mum and maximum generator active load being maintained.
L............... The letter L stands for the exported power. This means, that the power is
always exported to the mains, with the minimum and maximum genera-
tor active load being maintained.

Power controller Setpoint value 2 active load controller B/L/F 0..6,900 kW


P set2 B0000kW The setpoint value 2 is active if the Automatic 2 (voltage applied to terminal 5) is
released. The mains interchange power is then adjusted to the preset value.
The active load is adjusted to the preset value.
F............... The letter F stands for sepoint value control (= constant power). This
means that the generator always supplies a constant active power value.
Following the activation of a setpoint value control, the genset is always
started.
The mains interchange power is then adjusted to the preset value.
B .............. The letter B stands for the imported power. This means, that the power is
always only imported from the mains, with the minimum and maximum
generator active load being maintained.
L............... The letter L stands for the exported power. This means, that the power is
always exported to the mains, with the minimum and maximum genera-
tor active load being maintained.

NOTE

The start of the genset depends on whether an automatic add-on and settling have been selected.
If not, the genset is always started (description starting page 69).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 59/153
4.4.2 Frequency C ontroller
Alternatively, the following mask become visible:

a.) Frequency Control via Three-position Controller (Standard)

Freq. controller Frequency controller ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The generator frequency is controlled.Depending on the task (isolated
operation / synchronization), the generator frequency is controlled in dif-
ferent ways. The subsequent masks of this option are indicated.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

f-contr. active Starting frequency frequency controller 0.0..70.0 Hz


at: 00.0Hz The frequency controller is only activated after the generator frequency has ex-
ceeded the preset value. This way, an unintended re-adjustment of the setpoint
value of a sub-governor can be avoided when starting the engine.

Delay time for Delayed start of the frequency controller 0..999 s


f-contr. 000s The starting frequency of the frequency controller must be exceeded for the period
of time specified here.

Freq. controller Setpoint ramp Frequency controller 1..50 Hz/s


ramp 00Hz/s The change of the setpoint value is supplied to the governor via a ramp. The gover-
nor speed by which the setpoint value is modified is changed via the ramp slope.
The faster the modification of the setpoint value, the higher the value to be entered
here.

Freq. controller Insensitivity frequency controller 0.02..1.00 Hz


dead band 0.00Hz Isolated operation The generator rated frequency is controlled in such a manner
that the deviation of the actual value from the preset generator
rated frequency, when correctly adjusted, does not exceed the
value of the set insensivity (setpoint value from mask setting).
Synchronization ...The generator frequency is controlled in such a manner, that the
differential frequency, when correctly adjusted, does not exceed
the set insensitivity. The mains (MCB) or busbar (GCB) frequen-
cies respectively are taken as a setpoint value.

Freq. controller Minimum turn-on time frequency controller 10..250 ms


Time pulse>000ms The minimum turn-on time of the relay should be chosen in a way to ensure that the
subsequent setting device safely reacts to a pulse which corresponds to the preset
time. To obtain the best possible control, the shortest possible time has to be set.

Freq. controller Amplification factor frequency controller 0.1..99.9


Gain Kp 00.0 The amplification factor Kp affects the turn-on time of the relay. By increasing this
factor, the turn-on time can be increased in case of a certain system deviation.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 60/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
b.) Analog Controller Outputs (Option Qf - Instead of Three-position Controller)

Initial state Initial state frequency controller 0..100 %


Frequency 000% Setting of the analog controller output with the controller switched off. This value
also is referred to as an initial value, for instance when changing from an active load
controller to a frequency controller.

Freq. controller Frequency controller ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The generator frequency is controlled.Depending on the task (isolated
operation / synchronization), the generator frequency is controlled in dif-
ferent ways. The subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

f-contr. active Starting frequency frequency controller 0.0..70.0 Hz


at: 00.0Hz The frequency controller is only activated after the generator frequency has ex-
ceeded the preset value. This way, an unintended re-adjustment of the setpoint
value of a sub-governor can be avoided when starting the engine.

Delay time for Delayed start of the frequency controller 0..999 s


f-contr. 000s The starting frequency of the frequency controller must be exceeded for the period
of time specified here.

Freq. controller Setpoint ramp Frequency controller 2..50 Hz/s


ramp 00Hz/s The change of the setpoint value is supplied to the governor via a ramp. The gover-
nor speed by which the setpoint value is modified, is changed via the ramp slope.
The faster the modification of the setpoint value, the higher the value to be entered
here.

Freq. controller P-gain frequency controller 1..240


Gain Kpr 000 The gain is indicated by the proportional coefficient (see analog controller).

Freq. controller Reset time frequency controller 0.0..60.0 s


Reset time 00,0s The reset time Tn marks the I-share of the PID-controller (see analog controller).

Freq. controller Derivative-action time frequency controller 0.00..6.00 s


Deriv.time 0,00s The derivative-action time Tn marks the D-share of the PID-controller (see analog
controller).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 61/153
c.) Frequency Control via the Speed Controller SG 1 (via AMG 3)

Initial state Start position actuator 0..100 %


f-control. 000% Setting of the analog controller output with the controller switched off. This value is
important for the starting process of the genset. Select the initial state in a way to
ensure that the genset reaches more than 45 Hz while in initial state.

Actuating signal Control signal frequency minimum 0..100 %


Freq. min 000% Lower restriction for the controller output.

Actuating signal Control signal frequency maximum 0..100 %


Freq. max 000% Upper restriction for the controller output.

Freq. controller Frequency controller ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The generator frequency is controlled.Depending on the task (isolated
operation / synchronization), the generator frequency is controlled in dif-
ferent ways. The subsequent masks of this option are indicated.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

f-contr. active Starting frequeny frequency controller 0.0..70.0 Hz


at: 00.0Hz The frequency controller is only activated after the generator frequency has ex-
ceeded the preset value. This way, an unintended re-adjustment of the setpoint
value of a sub-governor can be avoided when starting the engine.

Delay time for Delayed start of the frequency controller 0..999 s


f-contr. 000s The starting frequency of the frequency controller must be exceeded for the period
of time specified here.

Freq. controller Setpoint ramp Frequency controller 2..50 Hz/s


ramp 00Hz/s The change of the setpoint value is supplied to the governor via a ramp. The gover-
nor speed by which the setpoint value is modified, is changed via the ramp slope.
The faster the modification of the setpoint value is carried out, the higher the value
must be to be entered here.

weight nominal Derivative-action time marking number 0.0..100.0 %


power 000.0% For a moment, the marking number has an influence on the effect of a load shift.
The percentage setting value refers to the rated active power. By incresing the
marking number, the value of the feedback variable can be increased.

time constant Time constant ordinal number 1..4


number 0 The ordinal number marks the time characteristic of the back coupling. By increasing
the ordinal number, the duration of the feedback can be increased.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 62/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.4.3 Voltage con troller

Initial state Initial state voltage controller 0..100 %


Voltage 000% Setting of the analog controller output with the controller switched off. This value
Only, if also is referred to as an initial value, for instance when changing from a cos ϕ- to a
option Qu is available. voltage controller.

Volt. controller Voltage controller ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The generator frequency is controlled.The subsequent masks of this op-
tion are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

V-contr. active Starting voltage 50..400 V


at: 000V As soon as the generator reaches the preset voltage, the U-governor is activated.

Delay time for Turn-on delay U-governor 0..999 s


V-contr. 000s U-governor is activated after the starting voltage has been reached and after the
preset time has ended.

a.) Three-position Controller (Standard)

Volt. controller Insensitivity voltage controller [1] 0.1..15.0 V; [4] 0.5..60.0 V


dead band 00.0V Isolated operation .. The voltage is controlled in such a manner that the deviation of
the actual value from the preset rated voltage, when correctly
adjusted, does not exceed the value of the preset insensivity
(setpoint value from mask setting).
Synchronization ..... The generator voltage is controlled in such a manner, that the
differential voltage, when correctly adjusted, does not exceed
the set insensitivity. The mains and busbar frequencies re-
spectively are taken as a setpoint value.

Volt. controller Minimum turn-on time frequency controller 20..250 ms


Time pulse>000ms The minimum turn-on time of the relay should be chosen in a way to ensure that the
subsequent setting device safely reacts to a pulse which corresponds to the preset
time. To obtain the best possible control, the shortest possible time has to be se-
lected.

Volt. controller Amplification factor voltage controller 0.1..99.9


Gain Kp 00,0 The amplification factor Kp affects the turn-on time of the relay. By increasing this
factor, the turn-on time can be increased in case of a certain system deviation.

b.) Analog Controller Outputs (Option Qu - Instead of Three-position Controller)

Volt. controller P-gain voltage controller 1..240


Gain Kpr 000 The gain is indicated by the proportional coefficient (see analog controller).

Volt. controller Reset time voltage controller 0.0..60.0 s


Reset time 00,0s The reset time Tn marks the I-share of the PID-controller (see analog controller).

Volt. controller Derivative-action time voltage controller 0.00..6.00 s


Deriv.time 0,00s The derivative-action time Tn marks the D-share of the PID-controller (see analog
controller).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 63/153
4.4.4 Power Facto r Controller [NxPB]

Pow.fact. contr. Power factor controller ON/OFF


ON ON ........... While in operation in parallel with the mains, the control of the power
factor cos ϕ is effected independent of the loadIn the event that currents
are too weak (secondary current less 5 % IN) the measurement of the
power factor is very unprecise. In order to avoid, the controller is auto-
matically interlocked in this case. The subsequent masks of this option
are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

Pow.fact. contr. Setpoint value power factor controller i0.70..1.00..k0.70


Setpoint= i0.00 The value of the reactive power is controlled in a way to form the preset power factor
(cos ϕ), when in the correctly adjusted state. The markings "i" and "k" stand for in-
ductive (generator overexcited) and capacitive (generator underexcited) reactive
power. This setpoint value is activated in the operation in parallel with the mains.

a.) Three-position Controller (Standard)

Pow.fact. contr. Insensitivity power factor controller 0.5..25.0 %


Dead band 00.0% The device automatically calculates the reactive power value referring to the power
factor setpoint value cos ϕsetpoint. While in operation in parallel with the mains, the
active power is controlled in such a manner that, in its regulated state, the actual
value deviates from the active power setpoint by the percentage value of the sensi-
tivity setting at the most.(setpoint value 1. In this case, the percentage value refers
to the generator rated power.

Pow.fact. contr. Amplification factor voltage controller 0.1..99.9


Gain Kp 00.0 The amplification factor Kp affects the turn-on time of the relay. By increasing this
factor, the turn-on time can be increased in case of a certain system deviation.

b.) Analog Controller Outputs (Option Qu - Instead of Three-position Controller)

Pow.fact. contr. P-gain voltage controller 1..240


Gain Kpr 000 The gain is indicated by the proportional coefficient (see analog controller).

Pow.fact. contr. Reset time voltage controller 0.2..60.0 s


Reset time 00,0s The reset time Tn marks the I-share of the PID-controller (see analog controller).

Pow.fact. contr. Derivative-action time voltage controller 0.00..6.00 s


Deriv.time 0,00s The derivative-action time Tn marks the D-share of the PID-controller (see analog
controller).

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 64/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.4.5 Active Load Controller [NxPB]

Power controller Active load controller ON/OFF


ON ON ........... With the active load controller switched on, the active load is automati-
cally regulated to the preset setpoint value, while in operation in parallel
with the mains (page 59/63). The subsequent masks of this option are
displayed.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

a.) Setpoint Ramp %/s

Power controller Setpoint ramp active load controller 0..100 %/s


ramp 000%/s The sepoint change is supplied to the governor as a percentage value per second,
referring to the generator rated power (see page 56). The governor speed by which
the setpoint value is modified is changed via the ramp slope. The faster the modifi-
cation of the setpoint value is carried out, the higher the value must be to be entered
here.

b.) Setpoint Ramp kW/s (optional)

Power controller Setpoint ramp active load controller 0..100 kW/s


ramp 000kW/s The sepoint change is supplied to the governor as a kW-value per second, referring
to the generator rated power (see page 56). The governor speed by which the set-
point value is modified, is changed via the ramp slope. The faster the modification of
the setpoint value is carried out, the higher the value must be to be entered here.

c.) Power Limitation

Power limit Power limitation maximum active load controller 10..120 %


P max.= 000 % If the maximum generator active load is to be restricted, a percentage value referring
to the generator rated power is entered in this mask, according to the preset setting
limits (see page 56). The governor regulates the genset in a way that this value is
not exceeded. The value "Pmax" only restricts the setpoint value of the active load
controller, but is of no importance for the isolated operation.

Power limit Power limitation minimum active load controller 0..50 %


P min.= 00 % If the minimum generator active load is to be restricted, a percentage value referring
to the generator rated power is entered in this mask, according to the preset setting
limits (see page 56). The governor regulates the genset in a way that this value is
not fallen below. This parameter is ignored as far as the set value power control is
concerned.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 65/153
d.) External Definition of a Setpoint Value (Option X)

Setpoint External definition of a setpoint value active load controller ON/OFF


external ON ON ........... The active load setpoint 2 can be preset via an external signal. The sub-
sequent masks of this option are displayed. This setpoint value is acti-
vated, if automatic 2 (terminal 5) is requested.
OFF.......... If this option is set to "OFF", a definition of a setpoint value via the
0..20 mA-input is not possible externally. The subsequent masks of this
option are not displayed. The internal active load setpoint value 2
"Psoll2"is referred to as a setpoint value for the control via the terminal 5.

Analog input Analog input definition of a setpoint value active load 0-20 / 4-20 mA
0-00mA The analog input of the active load controller (terminals 93, 94 and 95 - please ob-
serve terminal plan, there are a few exceptions where the setpoint value is applied to
the terminals 91 and 92) can be switched from 0-20 mA to 4-20 mA, depending on
the setpoint generator.
0-20 mA... Minimum value of the setpoint value at 0 mA; maximum value at 20 mA.
4-20 mA... Minimum value of the setpoint value at 4 mA; maximum value at 20 mA.

ATTENTION

Scaling of the interchange power sepoint value is also possible. When scaling the external analog
output for the import/export power control, do strictly observe that no F-power is entered
simultaneously with a B - or L-power.
External setpoint value 0/4 mA F B L B L
External setpoint value 20 mA F B L L B

ext. setpoint Scaling of the minimum value (fixed value performance) 0..9,999 kW
0mA F0000kW The minimum value of the active load is specified here (e. g. 0 kW).
ext. setpoint
4mA F0000kW

ext. setpoint Scaling of maximum value (fixed value performance) 0..9,999 kW


20mA F0000kW The maximum value of the active load is specified here (e. g. 100 kW).

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 66/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
e.) Three-position Controller (Standard)

Power controller Insensitivity active load controller 0.1..25.0 %


dead band 00.0% In operation in parallel with the mains, the active power is controlled in such a man-
ner that, in its regulated state, the actual value deviates from the active power set-
point by the percentage value of the sensitivity setting at the most. In this case, the
percentage value refers to the generator rated power (see page 56).

Power controller Amplification factor voltage controller 0.1..99.9


Gain Kp 00,0 The amplification factor K p affects the turn-on time of the relay. By increasing this
factor, the turn-on time can be increased in case of a certain system deviation.

P-contr. dead Reduction of the sensitivity active load controller 1.0..9.9


band ratio *0.0 If after the regulation of the governor, no resetting pulse was output for at least a pe-
riod of time of 5 s, the sensitivity is reduced by the set factor.
For example: In case of an insensitivity of 2.5 % and a factor 2.0, insensitivity is increased to
5.0 % after 5 s. In the event that the system deviation then exceeds 5.0 % again, the governor
automatically goes back to its original sensitivity (2.5 %). This input can be used, in the event of
small control deviations, to avoid unnecessarily frequent actuation processes, thereby protect-
ing the adjustment facility.

f.) Analog Controller Outputs (Option Qf - Instead of Three-position Controller)

Power controller P-gain voltage controller 1..240


Gain Kpr 000 The gain is indicated by the proportional coefficient (see analog controller).

Power controller Reset time active load controller 0.2..60.0 s


Reset time 00,0s The reset time Tn marks the I-share of the PID-controller (see analog controller).

Power controller Derivative-action time active load controller 0.0..6.0 s


Deriv.time 0,00s The derivative-action time Tn marks the D-share of the PID-controller (see analog
controller).

g.) Part-load Lead

Warm up load Limiting value part-load lead 5..110 %


setpoint 000 % In case that the genset needs to be warmed-up, a lower fixed value power may be
preset, so that the genset may first warm up. The generator active load which is to
be regulated during the warm-up, is entered in this mask. The fixed value power is
regulated with reference to the rated power entered (see page 56).

Warm up load Time part-load lead 0..600 s


time 000s Input of the dwell time with part-load, after the first closing of the generator power
circuit breaker in operation in parallel with the mains. If a warm-up of the genset is
not required, this parameter has to be set to zero.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 67/153
4.4.6 Load and/o r var sharing (options W/O)

Active power Active load sharing ON/OFF


Load-share ON ON ........... Load sharing (option W) with several generators operating in parallel.
The generator loads are shared in dependence of the preset value. The
subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

Loadshare factor Reference input value active load sharing 10..99 %


active pow. 00% By increasing the weighting factor, the final controlled variable (in isolated operation:
frequency, when mains-operated: interchange active power) has a stronger effect on
the control. The smaller the factor, the greater the influence of the subordinate refer-
ence input value (generator active load). The characteristic of the frequency control
(isolated operation) is determined by the final controlled variable, wheras the char-
acteristic of the active load sharing is determined by the subordinate control quantity.

Reactive power var/reactive load sharing ON/OFF


Load share ON ON ........... Reactive load sharing (option O) with several generators operating in
parallel. The generator loads are shared in dependence of the preset
value. The subsequent masks of this option are indicated.
OFF.......... There is no control, and the subsequent masks of this option are not dis-
played.

Loadshare factor Reference input value active load sharing 10..99 %


react. pow. 00% By increasing the weighting factor, the final controlled variable (in isolated operation:
voltage, while in operation in parallel with the mains: interchange active power) has
a stronger effect on the control. The smaller the factor, the greater the influence of
the subordinate reference input value (generator reactive load). The characteristic of
the frequency control (isolated operation) is determined by the final controlled vari-
able, wheras the characteristic of the active load sharing is determined by the sub-
ordinate control quantity.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 68/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.5 Configuratio n of the Load Management [NxPB]

Configure Configuration of the load management YES/NO


automatic YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

4.5.1 Load-depen dent Start/Stop in Operation in Parallel with the Mains

NOTE

Please note, that the active load sharing must be set to "ON" no matter whether or not another
genset is available for the active load sharing. This guarantees that an automatic start/stop can be
carried out as described below:

Loadd.Start/Stop Load-dependent start/stop to terminal 3 ON/OFF


at ter. 3 ON ON ........... If this mask is switched on and the control input "Automatic 1" is applied
to terminal 3, an automatic start and stop is then carried out due to the
generator setpoint power 1 (see page 59). If the terminal 5 is applied si-
multaneously, the terminal 3 is given preference.
OFF.......... An automatic start and stop is not carried out, but the regulation of the
preset setpoint value is carried out in any case.

Loadd.Start/Stop Load-dependent start/stop to terminal 5 ON/OFF


at ter. 5 ON ON ........... If this mask is switched on and the control input "Automatic 2" is applied
to terminal 5, an automatic start and stop is then carried out due to the
generator setpoint power 2 (see page 59). If simultaneously, the termi-
nal 3 is still applied, the terminal 3 is given preference.
OFF.......... An automatic start and stop is not carried out, but the regulation of the
preset setpoint value is carried out in any case.

The subsequent masks of this option are even displayed if the load-dependent
start/stop has been deactivated on both terminals.

a.) Single Unit in Operation in Parallel with the Mains

The load-dependent start/stop is activated, if


• the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" has been selected and
• additionally, an interchange active power control has been activated by one of the
two digital inputs ("Automatic 1" or "Automatic 2") ("L" or "B"-power), and
• if one or both input masks "Load-dep. start/stop on term. 3/5" are set to "ON".

MOP: gen.minimum Generator minimum setpoint power 0..2,000 kW


load 0000kW For the interchange active load control, the generator setpoint power value is re-
quired. In many cases it is useful to start the genset only after reaching a certain
generator power setpoint, so that the genset is operated with a reasonalbe effi-
ciency. The genset must for example supply a minimum of 40 kW active load to be
started.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 69/153
Add-on delay Starting delay load-dependent start/stop 0..999 s
mains oper. 000s As soon as the generator starting power is reached, the start can be delayed. In or-
der to avoid that the genset starts after brief load switch-ons, the start-delay time in
seconds can be entered here. In order to guarantee the start of the genset, the
starting power must therefore be interrupted during this period of time.

Shed-off delay Settling time load-dependent start/stop 0..999 s


mains oper. 000s As soon as the generator settle power is reached, the stop can be delayed. In order
to avoid a switching-off of the genset stops after brief load deficits, the stop-delay
time in seconds can be entered here. The settle power must therefore be interrupted
during this period of time, in order to guarantee the stop of the genset.

b.) Settling Hysteresis

NOTE

The subsequent mask specifies the settling hysteresis for the individual gensets while in operation
in parallel with the mains, as well as for the gensets interconnected with other gensets while in
operation in parallel with the mains, and while in isolated operation in parallel with other gensets.
However, it appears only once at this point.

Hysteresis add- Hysteresis load-dependent start/stop 0..999 kW


on/off op. 000kW The settling power of the genset is determined via the hysteresis. The hysteresis
avoids that a genset keeps on starting and then stops again.

c.) Operation in Parallel with the Mains (Mains Incoming Power Control with One Unit)

In general, the following applies:

1st case: Start of the genset If [PNT.setpoint - PNT.acutal > Pstart] the genset starts. (a)

2nd case: Stop of the genset If [PNT.setpoint - PNT.actual + PGN.act.tot < Pstart - Physt] the genset stops. (b)

Example The power consumption (imported power) is 50 kW. This value is entered in the set-
point value mask (see chapter "governor") as "B0050kW". The generator is to be op-
erated with a minimum of 30 kW.

PNT.setpoint = -50 kW... an imported power has to be entered as a negative number, an


exported power as a positive number Zahl.
Pstart = 30 kW............ the minimum power requested by the genset.
Physt = 10 kW............ the power hysteresis for the settle.

If used in the above mentioned formulas, this means:

Example for the 1st case The genset starts at the following imported power: If formula (a) is transposed, it
follows

[PNT.actual < PNT.setpoint - Pstart] ⇒ PNT.actual < - 50 kW - 30 kW = -80 kW ⇒ "B0080 kW"

To start the machine, an imported power of at least 80 kW is necessary. It is then


operated at a minimum power of 30 kW.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 70/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Example for the 2nd case The genset stops if it has to deliver less than the minimum power minus hysteresis.
This is the case at the following generator actual power: If formula (b) is transposed,
it follows

[PGN.act = settling power genset < - PNT.setpoint + PNT.actual + Pstart - Physt]


[PGN.actual < - 50 kW + 50 kW + 30 kW - 10 kW = 20 kW

If the generator falls below its minimum power, minus the hysteresis, it is settled.
Thus, the imported power value remains the same until just before the genset is set-
tled. After settling the generator, the imported power increases to 70 kW.

d.) Interconnection with Other Gensets in Parallel with the Mains (N2PB, Options W/O)

The load-dependent start/stop is activated, if for each device


• the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" has been selected and
• additionally, an interchange active power control has been activated by one of the
two digital inputs ("Automatic 1" or "Automatic 2") ("L" or "B"-power), and
• all inputs like Start-/settling power, Start/settling time, selected setpoints, are
identical for all subscribers and
• if one or both input masks "Load-dep. start/stop on term. 3/5" are set to "ON" and
• the input masks "active load sharing" and "reactive load sharing" are set to "ON"
and
• all gensets are given the same rated power.

NOTE

The subsequent parameter is only actived if an additional genset is to be started in operation in


parallel with the mains. The first genset starts due to a generator minimum power, as described for
the individual operation.

Reserve power Stand-by power mains operated, load-dependent start/stop 0..999 kW


mains op. 000kW The start of another genset is specified via the stand-by power. The stand-by power
follows from a currently available total generator rated active load (generator rated
active load × the number of closed generator power circuit breakers), and the current
total generator actual active load. The stand-by power of the system is calculated by
deducting the current total generator actual load from the currently available total
generator rated active load. If this stand-by power is fallen below, the next genset is
started.

total generator-rated active power


- total current generator-actual-active load

= stand-by power

Isolated/mains Priority of gensets 0..8


Priority 0 A forced starting sequence of the individual gensets is obtained with the priority. The
genset with the lowest set number has the highest priority. This gensets will be the
first to start and the last to stop. In case of equal priorities, the starting sequence is
determined by the running hours. The genset with fewer running hours is given pref-
erence. In case of equal running hours, the genset with the lower generator number
is allowed to start.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 71/153
e.) Operation in Parallel with the Mains (Mains Incoming Power Control with more Gensets)

In general, the following applies:

3rd case: Start of first genset None of the interconnected generator power circuit breakers has been closed yet.

If [PNT.setpoint - PNT.acutal > Pstart] the genset starts. (c)

4th case: Start of addition. gensets At least one interconnected GCB is closed.

If [PGN.act.sp + Preserve.parallel > Prated.sp] the next genset starts. (d)

5th case: Settle At least two interconnected generator power circuit breakers are closed.

If [PGN.act.sp + Preserve.parallel + Physt + Prated < Prated.sp] the genset stops. (e)

6th case: Settling the last genset Only one of the interconnected generator power circuit breakers is closed.

If [PNT.setpoint - PNT.actual + PGN.act.tot < Pstart - Physt] the genset stops.

Example The imported active load to be regulated is 0 kW. This value is entered in the setpoint
value mask (see chapter "governor") als "B0000kW" (corresponds to "L0000kW").
The stand-by power in the system should be 40 kW. The power hysteresis should be
20 kW. Three machines should be operated interconnected. The rated power of a
genset is 200 kW. The minimum power of a machine should be 30 kW

Prated = 200 kW......... rated power of a genset


Prated sp ..................... Total sum of the rated powers of the gensets with the GCB
closed
PStart tot = 30 kW ....... Minimum power of a genset
PNT.actual .................... Current mains power
PNT.setpoint = B0000 kW setpoint value mains power
PReserve.parallel = 40 kW stand-by power in operation in parallel with the mains
PHyst = 20 kW ........... power hysteresis
AnzGLS ................... Number of the closed power circuit breakers

Example for the 3rd case Imported load at which the first machine is started:

PNT.act < PNT.set - Pstart.gen


PNT.act < 0 kW - 30 kW = -30 kW ⇒ B0030 kW

To start the first machine, an imported power of at least 30 kW is necessary. It is then


operated at a minimum active load of 30 kW.

Example for the 4th case Generator active load at which the second machine is started:

PGN.act > PRated tot - (Preserve.parallel / AnzGLS)


PGN.act > 200 kW – (40 kW / 1) = 160 kW

If the generator active load exceeds 160 kW, the preset stand-by power is fallen be-
low. This way, the next machine is started.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 72/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Example for the 4th case generator active load of each individual machine, at which the third machine is
started:

PGN.act > Prtd.tot - (Preserve.parallel / NoGCB) - Prated


PGN.act > 400 kW – (40 kW / 2) - 200 kW = 180 kW

If the generator actual active load of both machine exceeds 360 kW, (each machine
supplies more than 180 kW), the preset stand-by power is fallen below. This way, the
next machine is started.

Example for the 5th case generator active load of each individual machine, at which the third machine is set-
tled:

PGN.Act.tot < PRated.tot - PReserve.Parallel - P-rated - PHyst


PGN.act.tot < 600 kW - 40 kW - 200 kW - 20 kW = 340 kW
(PGN.act < PGN.act.tot ) / NoGCB = 340 kW / 3 = 113.3 kW

If the generator actual active load of the three machines falls below 340 kW (each
machine supplies less than 113.3 kW), one machine is settled. After settling one ma-
chine, the preset stand-by power is still available.

Example for the 5th case generator active load of each individual machine, at which one of the two machines is
settled:

PGN.Act.tot < PRated.tot - Preserve.parallel - P-rated - Physt


PGN.act.tot < 400 kW - 40 kW - 200 kW - 20 kW = 140 kW
(PGN.act < PGN.act.tot) / NoGCB = 140 kW / 2 = 70 kW

If the generator actual active load of the two machines falls below 140 kW (each ma-
chine supplies less than 70 kW), one machine is settled. After settling the
machine, the preset stand-by power is still available.

Example for the 6th case Generator active load at which the last machine is settled:

PGN.act < - PNT.set + PNT.act + Padd-on.tot. - Physt


PGN.act < - 0 kW + 0 kW + 30 kW - 20 kW = 10 kW

If the generator falls below its minimum active load, minus the hysteresis, it is settled.
Thus, the imported power value remains the same until just before the genset is set-
tled. After settling the generator, the imported power increased to 10 kW.

f.) Isolated Operation in Parallel with Other Gensets (N2PB, Options W/O)

The load-dependent start/stop is activated, if for each device


• the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" has been selected and
• all inputs like Start-/settling power, Start/settling time, frequency setpoint values,
are identical for all subscribers and
• if one or both input masks "Load-dep. start/stop on term. 3/5" are set to "ON" and
• the input masks "active load sharing" and "reactive load sharing" are set to "ON"
and
• all gensets are given the same rated power.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 73/153
Reserve power Stand-by power isolated operation, load-dependent start/stop 0..999 kW
isol.op. 000kW The stand-by power follows from a currently available total generator rated active
load (generator rated active load × the number of closed generator power circuit
breakers), and the current total generator actual active load. The stand-by power of
the system is calculated by deducting the current total generator actual load from the
currently available total generator rated active load. If this stand-by power is fallen
below, the next genset is started.

total generator-rated active power


- total current generator-actual-active load

= stand-by power

NOTE

The stand-by power should be selected in such a manner to make sure that the expected loast
shifts can be buffered by the genset.

Add-on delay Starting delay load-dependent start/stop 0..999 s


isol.op. 000s As soon as the generator starting power is reached, the start can be delayed. In or-
der to avoid that the genset starts after brief load switch-ons, the start-delay time in
seconds can be entered here. The start power must therefore be interrupted during
this period of time, in order to guarantee the start of the genset.

Stopdelay Settling time load-dependent start/stop 0..999 s


Isol. op. 000s As soon as the generator settling power is reached, the stop can be delayed. In or-
der to avoid a switching-off of the genset stops after brief load deficits, the stop-
delay time in seconds can be entered here. The settling power must therefore be
interrupted during this period of time, in order to guarantee the stop of the genset.

In general, the following applies:

7th case: Genset start If [PGN.act.tot. + Preserve.isol. + > Prtd.tot] the genset starts. (f)

8th case: Genset stop If [PGN.act.tot + Preserve.isol + Physt + Prted + < Prated.tot] the genset stops.

Example Two gensets are operated in isolated operation in parallel with other gensets. One
genset should be operating continuously.

Prated = 200 kW......... rated active load of a genset


Preserve isolated = 60 kW
Physt = 30 kW

Example for the 8th case Generator active load at which the second machine is started:

PGN.act. > Prated.tot - Preserve.isol


PGN.act > 200 kW - 60 kW = 140 kW

In case of a generator active load exceeding 140 kW, the preset minimum stand-by
power is fallen below. This way, the next machine is started.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 74/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Example for the 9th case Generator active load at which the second machine is started:

PGN.act.tot. < Prtd.tot. - Preserve.isol.- Prated - Physt


PGN.act.tot. < 400 kW - 60 kW - 200 kW - 30 kW = 110 kW
PGN.act. < PGN.act.tot. / NoGCB = 110 kW / 2 = 55 kW

If, in the event of a decreasing isolated load, the total generator actual active load is
so much reduced, that one single machine is sufficient to supply the stand-by power,
then the second machine is settled.

4.5.2 Temperature Dependent Start/Stop (Option Tz)

Start/Stop temp. CHP temperature dependent start/stop on terminal 3 ON/OFF


at ter. 3 ON ON ........... If this mask is switched on and if the control input "Automatic 1" is ap-
plied to terminal 3, a temperature dependent start/stop is effected. If the
terminal 5 is applied simultaneously, the terminal 3 is given preference.
OFF.......... No automatic temperature dependent start/stop is effected via the termi-
nal 3.

Start/Stop temp. CHP temperature dependent start/stop on terminal 5 ON/OFF


at ter. 5 ON ON ........... If this mask is switched on and if the control input "Automatic 2" is ap-
plied to terminal 5, a temperature dependent start/stop is effected. If the
terminal 3 is applied simultaneously, the terminal 3 is given preference.
OFF.......... No automatic temperature dependent start/stop is effected via the termi-
nal 5.

The subsequent masks of this option are even displayed if the temperature depend-
ent start/stop has been deactivated on both terminals.

Temperature of CHP Turn-on temperature 0..255 °C


Start 000°C The temperature value at which the genset is to be started, is entered in this maskIf
this value is fallen bleow, the genset starts automatically and runs continuously until
reaching the switch-off temperature.

Temperature of CHP Turn-on temperature 0..255 °C


Stop 000°C The temperature value at which the genset is to be stopped, is entered in this mask.
If the value is reached or exceeded, the genset stops automatically.

Start CHP turn-on delay 0..255 s


Delay time 000s For a turn-on to occur, the turn-on temperature must be fallen below without inter-
ruption for at least the period of time specified in this mask. If the actual value ex-
ceeds the threshold within this period of time, the time count is re-started (this time
lag applies for both, turn-on and turn-off time).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 75/153
4.5.3 Remote Con trol via Interface (Option Sb/Sf)
a.) Setpoint Value Specification via Interface Y1..Y5 (Option Sb)

serial Control Control via the interface COM Y1..Y5 ON/OFF


com Y1Y5 ON ON ........... The control via the serial interface is activated, provided that this option
is available in this device, that the control is set to "ON", that the operat-
ing mode is set to "AUTOMATIC" and the digital input "Automatic 2"
(terminal 5) has been selected. The genset can be started and stopped
via "remote start" (description of the serial interface in the annex). The
generator rated active load and the generator power factor cos ϕ can
also be transferred. If an unsuccessful data exchange has been de-
tected, an error class 1 error is output.
OFF.......... The reception of control data is rejected. The performance "Psetpoint2"
which is set internally, is activated with the digital input "Automatic 2".
The internally set rated power factor cos ϕ is accessed simultaneously.
The interface monitoring function is switched off.

b.) Setpoint Value Specification via Interface X1..X5 (Option Sf)

serial Control Control via the interface COM X1..XY5 ON/OFF


com X1X5 ON ON ........... The control via the serial interface is activated, provided that this option
is available in this device, that the direct parameterization is set to "OFF",
that the control is set to "ON" and the operating mode is set to "AUTO-
MATIC" and that the digital input "Automatic 2" (terminal 5) has been
selected. The genset can be started and stopped via "remote start" (de-
scription of the serial interface in the annex). The generator rated active
load and the generator power factor cos ϕ can also be transferred. If an
unsuccessful data exchange has been detected, an error class 1 error is
output.
OFF.......... The reception of control data is rejected. The performance "Psetpoint2"
which is set internally, is activated with the digital input "Automatic 2".
The internally set rated power factor cos ϕ is accessed simultaneously.
The interface monitoring function is switched off.

4.6 Configuratio n of the Circuit Breakers

Configure Configuration of the Power Circuit Breakers YES/NO


breaker? YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 76/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.6.1 Circuit Break er Logic
The device fully automatically controls the two power circuit breakers (MCB and GCB).
Breaker logic:
Up to five different control functions (modes) can be selected. The modes are: EX-
PARALLEL
TERNAL, PARALLEL, CLOSED TRANS., OPEN TRANS. and INTERCHANGE.

a.) Version N2PB

STOP TEST MANUAL AUTOMATIC


EXTERNAL Switch logic "External"
In this operating mode, the MCB and the GCB are operated in "MANUAL" mode only. In operation in parallel with the
mains, uncoupling from the mains is carried out via the MCB or the GCB in the event of mains faults. The power circuit
breakers are not automatically closed in emergency power operation. Emergency power operation in accordance with
DIN VDE 0108 is not therefore possible in this power circuit breaker logic.
The GCB is The GCB and the MCB are not The MCB and the GCB can be The GCB is opened for bucking or for
opened. operated. Exception: The circuit manually switched on and off without decoupling from the mains, but is not
breakers are opened for decoupling synchronization. The circuit breakers closed for boosting. The MCB is only
from the mains. are opened for decoupling from the opened for decoupling from the mains, and
mains. is never closed.
PARALLEL switch logic "parallel with mains"
This operating mode represents continuous operation in parallel with the mains.
The GCB is The GCB and the MCB are not Operation in parallel with the mains Via a motor request, the GCB is synchro-
opened, the operated. Exception: Load test by can be assumed via the "GCB ON" nized and operation in parallel with the
MCB is not actuating the "GCB ON" button. or "MCB ON" button. mains is assumed. On release of the motor
operated. Termination of the load test with the request, the generator power is reduced,
"GCB OFF" button. Emergency the GCB is opened and the unit is shut off
power: Automatic setting of the with coasting. Emergency power operation
GCB. is terminated following the expiry of a mains
settling time with the reverse synchroniza-
tion of the MCB. Even if no motor request is
present, the MCB is closed when the bus-
bar is voltage-free
OPEN TRANS. switch logic "ATS automatic transfer switching"
In this operating mode, the MCB and GCB are never synchronized.
The GCB is The GCB and the MCB are not Via the "GCB ON" and "MCB ON" A switch is made to generator operation via
opened, the operated. Exception: Load test by button, a switch can be made to a motor request. On release of the motor
MCB is not actuating the "GCB ON" button. either generator or mains operation. request a switch is made back to mains
operated. Termination of the load test via the The "MANUAL STOP" button opens operation. Even if no motor request is
"GCB OFF" or "MCB ON" button. the GCB and simultaneously stops present, the MCB is closed when the bus-
Emergency power: Automatic setting the unit. bar is voltage-free. Emergency power
of the GCB. operation is terminated following the expiry
of a mains settling time with the reverse
synchronization of the MCB.
CLOSED TRANS. switch logic "no-break-transfer"
In this operating mode, the MCB and the GCB are synchronized, in order to avoid a voltage-free busbar. Immediately
after the synchronization of one power circuit breaker, the other is opened. Continuous operation in parallel with the
mains is not possible.
The GCB is The GCB and the MCB are not Via the "GCB ON" and "MCB ON" The GCB is synchronized via a motor
opened, the operated. Exception: Load test by button, synchronization to either request. The MCB is then opened. Follow-
MCB is not actuating the "GCB ON" button. generator or mains operation can be ing the release of the motor request, the
operated. Termination of the load test via the carried out. MCB is reverse synchronized and the GCB
"GCB OFF" or "MCB ON" button. is then opened. Emergency power opera-
Emergency power: Automatic setting tion is terminated following the expiry of a
of the GCB. mains settling time with the reverse syn-
chronization of the MCB. Even if no motor
request is present, the MCB is closed when
the busbar is voltage-free
INTERCHANGE switch logic "softloading"
In this operating mode, the MCB and the GCB are synchronized, in order to avoid a voltage-free busbar. The
actuation of a power circuit breaker under load is avoided. Otherwise, the other power circuit breaker is
opened immediately following the synchronization of the one power circuit breaker. Continuous operation in
parallel with the mains is not possible. Following the reset of the unit request, the MCB is synchronized, the
unit is bucked with a reduction in power. Regardless of the preset setpoint value, "B000kW" is always ad-
justed.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 77/153
STOP TEST MANUAL AUTOMATIC
The GCB is The GCB and the MCB are not Via the "GCB ON" and "MCB ON" Via a motor request, the GCB is synchro-
opened, the operated. Exception: Load test by button, synchronization to either nized and the generator power is reduced.
MCB is not actuating the "GCB ON" button. generator operation or operation in The MCB is then opened. Following the
operated. Termination of the load test via the parallel with the mains can be car- release of the motor request, the MCB is
"GCB OFF" or "MCB ON" button. ried out. reverse synchronized and the GCB is then
Emergency power: Automatic setting opened. Emergency power operation is
of the GCB. terminated following the expiry of a mains
settling time with the reverse synchroniza-
tion of the MCB. Even if no motor request is
present, the MCB is closed when the bus-
bar is voltage-free

b.) Version N1PB

STOP TEST MANUAL AUTOMATIC


EXTERNAL Switch logic "External"
In this operating mode, the GCB is never synchronized. In operation in parallel with the mains, decoupling from the
mains is carried out via the GCB in the event of mains faults. The power circuit breaker is not automatically closed in
emergency power operation.
The GCB is The GCB is not operated. Exception: The GCB can be manually switched The GCB is opened for bucking or for
opened. The circuit breaker is opened for on and off without synchronization. decoupling from the mains, but is not
decoupling from the mains. The circuit breaker is opened for closed in the event of a motor request.
decoupling from the mains.
PARALLEL switch logic "parallel with mains"
This operating mode may be used both in the case of an isolated system, an isolated parallel system and a system
which is operated in parallel with the mains.
The GCB is The GCB is not operated. Exception: Operation in parallel with the mains Via a motor request, the GCB is synchro-
opened. Load test by actuating the "GCB ON" can be assumed via the "GCB ON" nized and operation in parallel with the
button. Termination of the load test button. mains is assumed. On release of the motor
with the "GCB OFF" button. Emer- request, the generator power is reduced,
gency power: The GCB is opened the GCB is opened and the unit is shut off,
for decoupling from the mains. followed by a coasting.

Add-on/off ramp Start-/stop ramp 0..999 s


max.time 000s This time function has an effect on two other functions:

Settle
The time specified is the maximum time during which the performance of the genset
is reduced. If within this period of time, 3 % of the generator rated load (see
page 56) are not fallen below, the GCB is nevertheless opened.

Start with interchange synchronization


If, during a softloading, the required imported power "zero" is not achieved during the
time specified, the corresponding message "Imported power.<>0" and an error
class 1 is output. The relay programmed with the parameter 78 is set simultane-
ously.

Open GCB with F2 Max. adm. time to start another genset in the event of F2 errors 0..999 s
max.time 000s Prerequisite: Active load sharing and automatic start/stop are set to "ON". The
generator is operating in isolated operation and at least one of the other genera-
tors is connected to a distribution bus.

In the event that an error class 2 error occurs, the switching-off of the genset can be
delayed by this period of time. This way, it is possible for another genset to start and
to take over the load.Following this period of time, the shutdown is activated.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 78/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.6.2 Switch Logic GCB

GCB closing Permanent pulse output synchronization gen. switch constant/impulse


relay °°°°°°°° Constant . The relay "Command: Close GCB " can be directly looped into the lock-
type chain of the power circuit breaker. Following the output of the add-
on pulse and the response of the power circuit breaker, the relay "Com-
mand: Close GCB" remains picked up. If the power circuit breaker has to
be opened, the relay drops off.
Pulse ....... The relay "Command: Close GCB " outputs an add-on pulse. The gen-
erator power circuit breaker must locked up by an external lock-type cir-
cuit. The response of the generator power circuit breaker is used for the
detection of closed contacts.
In both cases, the relay "Command: Open GCB" will pick up to open the generator
circuit breaker. The continuous impulse will even drop off in the event that, following
the add-on pulse, there is no immediate response, or, if there is a mistake concern-
ing the wiring of the terminal 23/24 on the busbar and the errors which are output the
device, are therefore not identical.

GCB open relay Opening of the GCB (terminal 41/42) NO-contact/NC-contact


NC-contact NO-contact ................... If the generator power circuit breaker has to be opened, the
relay "Command: Open GCB" (terminal 41/42) picks up. Following the
"response: GCB is open" the relay drops off again.
NC-contact.................... If the generator power circuit breaker has to be opened, the
relay "Command: Open GCB" (terminal 41/42) drops off. Following the
"response: GCB is open" the relay picks up again.

4.6.3 Synchroniza tion (Only for Synchronous Generators)

Synchronize Max. admissible differential freq. synchronization (pos. slip) 0.02..0.49 Hz


df max 0,00Hz The prerequisite for the output of an add-on order is that the preset differential fre-
quency is fallen below. This value indicates the upper frequency (positive value cor-
responding to positive slip Æ generator frequency greater than busbar frequency
during synchronization of GCB; Busbar frequency greater than mains frequency
during synchronization MCB). The synchronizing frequency is dfmax/2.

Synchronize Max. admissible Differential freq. synchronization (neg. slip) 0.00..-0.49 Hz


df min -0.00Hz The prerequisite for the output of an add-on order is that the preset differential fre-
quency is fallen below. This value indicates the upper frequency (negative value cor-
responding to positive slip Æ generator frequency less than busbar frequency during
synchronization of GCB; Busbar frequency less than mains frequency during syn-
chronization MCB).

Synchronize Max. admissible differential voltage synchronization [1] 1..20 V; [4] 2..60 V
dU max 00V The prerequisite for the output of an add-on order is that the preset differential volt-
age is fallen below.

Synchronize Min. pulse duration add-on relay synchronization 0.05..0.26 s


time pul.> 0.00s The duration of the add-on pulse can be adjusted to the subsequent switch unit (ap-
plies to synchronization and black start).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 79/153
Closing time Switcher time delay generator switch synchronization 40..300 ms
GCB 000ms The inherent switching time of the generator power circuit breaker corresponds to
the lead time of the add-on order. The add-on order is output at the set point of time
before reaching the synchronous time, irrespective of the differential frequency.

Closing time Switcher time delay mains circuit breaker synchronization 40..300 ms
MCB 000ms The inherent switching time of the mains power circuit breaker corresponds to the
lead time of the add-on order. The add-on order is output at the set point of time
before reaching the synchronous time, irrespective of the differential frequency.

Automat. breaker Automatic switch unblocking ON/OFF


deblocking ON This function serves as a switch unblocking function for switches that are in their
"tripped"-position.
ON ........... Prior to each add-on pulse, a "command Open GCB"-, or a. "command:
Open MCB"-pulse is output for about 1 second. An add-on signal is then
output until the circuit breaker is closed.
OFF.......... While being closed, the switch is only activated via the add-on pulse.
Prior to the closing pulse, no opening pulse is output.

4.6.4 Synchroniz ing Time Monitoring

Sync.time contr. Synchronizing time monitoring ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The synchronization is time monitored. The subsequent masks of this
option are displayed.
OFF.......... No monitoring is carried out, and a synchronization is attempted as long
as it can be carried out. The subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Sync.time contr. Final value synchronizing time monitoring 10..999 s


Delay time 000s If the synchronization of the GCB or MCB is started, the time counter is started fol-
lowing the expiry of delayed motor monitoring.If, following the preset time, the power
circuit breaker has not been closed, the warning message "Sync. time GCB" or
"Sync time MCB" is output. There are further attempts to close the power circuit
breaker.

Tripping of fault class 1

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 80/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.6.5 Black Start ( Only for Synchronous Generators)
If the busbar is dead, a direct add-on of the generator circuit breaker (GCB) or mains
circuit breaker (MCB) is possible (black start). If both add-on orders are released si-
multaneously, the MCB is given preference if the input "Release MCB" is set.

NOTE

The mains circuit breaker is opened by no means, except as a mains protection function or if there
is an emergency power case.

GCB dead bus op. Black start generator power circuit breaker ON/OFF
ON ON ........... In case of a dead busbar or an open mains circuit breaker, a black start
is carried out, provided that an operating condition which is admissible
within the set parameters, is detected. The subsequent masks of this op-
tion are displayed.
OFF.......... A black start is not effected, and the subsequent masks of this option are
not displayed.

GCB dead bus op. Max. differential frequency black start GCB 0.0..5.00 Hz
df max 0,00Hz As a prerequisite for the output of the add-on order, the deviation of the generator
frequency from the setpoint value must not exceed the pre-set value.

GCB dead bus op. Max. admissible differential voltage black start GCB [1] 1..20 V; [4] 2..60 V
dU max 00V As a prerequisite for the output of the add-on order, the deviation of the generator
voltage from the setpoint value must not exceed the pre-set value.

MCB dead bus op. Black start generator mains circuit breaker ON/OFF
ON ON ........... In case of a dead busbar or an open generator circuit breaker, a black
[N2PB/NEB] start is carried out, provided that an operating condition which is admis-
sible within the set parameters, is detected. The subsequent masks of
this option are displayed.
OFF.......... A black start is not effected, and the subsequent masks of this option are
not displayed.

4.6.6 Add-on Fun ction (Only for Asynchronous Generators)

GCB dead bus op Add-on generator power circuit breaker ON/OFF


ON ON ........... A generator frequency regulation is carried out based on the setpoint
value of the mains frequency. After reaching the subsequent add-on cri-
teria, the generator power circuit breaker is closed. The subsequent
masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... No add-on is carried out, and the subsequent masks of this option are
not displayed.

GCB dead bus op Max. admiss. differential frequency add-on GCB (pos. slip) 0.05..9.99 Hz
df max 0,00Hz The prerequisite for the output of an add-on order is that the preset differential fre-
quency is fallen below. This value indicates the upper frequency (positive value cor-
responding to positive slip Æ generator frequency greater than busbar frequency
during the add-on of the GCB;

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 81/153
GCB dead bus op. Min. admiss. differential frequency add-on GCB (neg. slip) 0.00..-9.99 Hz
df min -0.00Hz The prerequisite for the output of an add-on order is that the preset differential fre-
quency is fallen below. This value indicates the upper frequency (negative value cor-
responding to positive slip Æ generator frequency less than busbar frequency during
the add-on of the GCB;

Gen. breaker T-pulse generator power circuit breaker 0.05..0.26 s


Time pulse>000ms The duration of the add-on pulse can be adjusted to the subsequent switch unit.

4.6.7 Add-on Time Monitoring (Only for Asynchronous Generators)

Sync.time contr. Add-on time monitoring ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The add-on function is time monitored. The subsequent mask of this op-
tion is displayed.
OFF.......... The unsuccessful add-on is not monitored. The subsequent mask of this
option is not displayed.

Sync.time contr. Delay add-on monitoring 2..999 s


Delay time 000s If an add-on of the GCB is started, the time counter is started simultaneously. If, af-
ter the preset time, the power circuit breaker has not been closed, the warning mes-
sage "Add-on time GCB" is output. Further attempts are made to close the power
circuit breaker.

Tripping of fault class 1

4.6.8 Monitoring o f the Circuit Breaker (Switch Impulses)

Supervision GCB Monitoring GCB ON/OFF


ON ON ........... Monitoring of the generator power circuit breaker is carried out, except
while in the switch logic "EXTERNAL").If the circuit breaker cannot be
activated by the fifth attempt, a fault message reading "GCB malfunction
or Malfunction:MCB closed" is output.The relay with the parameter 74 is
set. Even following an error message, further attempts are made to close
the GCB. In the event that 2 seconds following the "Command: Open
GCB "-pulse the "response: GCB is open" is still detected, an error with
the message "malfunction GCB OPEN" is output. The relay with the pa-
rameter 76 is set. With the active load sharing activated, the add-on is
taken back, so that a further machine can close its circuit breaker.

Tripping of fault class 1

OFF.......... No monitoring of the GCBs.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 82/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Supervision MCB Monitoring MCB ON/OFF
ON ON ........... A monitoring of the mains circuit breaker is carried out, except while in
[N2PB/NEB] the switch logic "EXTERNAL").If the circuit breaker cannot be activated
by the fifth attempt, a fault message reading "Malfunction:MCB closed" is
output.The relay with the parameter 75 is set. Even following an error
message, further attempts are made to close the MCB. In the event that
2 seconds following the "Command: MCBopen" pulse,
the"Response:MCB is open" is still detected, an error with the message
"malfunction MCB OPEN" is output. The relay with the parameter 77 is
set. With the active load sharing activated, the add-on is taken back, so
that a further machine can close its circuit breaker.

Tripping of fault class 1

OFF.......... No monitoring of the GCBs.

4.6.9 Mains Deco upling [N2PB]


If the existing equipment is an isolated equipment, this parameterization mask and its
settings can be ignored. If 1-CB-devices are operated in parallel with the mains, the
GCB is always opened.

Mains decoupling Mains decoupling by MCB/GCB


via MCB In case of a response of the mains monitor, a decision may be made as to which
power circuit breaker has to be opened if an error occurs. If an isolated operation
may not be carried out with the generator, the power circuit breaker (GCB) must be
opened. If an isolated isolation is allowed, the mains circuit breaker (MCB) may be
opened.

4.6.10 Mains Settlin g Time for Asynchronous Generators

Mains settling Mains settling time 0..999 s


time 000s In order to prevent the backspacing synchronization of the generator with the mains
for a certain period of time following the detection of the return of the mains after a
power failure, the time lag for the no-load operation can be selected with the input of
this parameter. The following applies for devices with a power circuit breaker which
are to be operated in parallel with the mains: If the mains has not returned following
the mains settling time, the genset is stopped. As soon as the mains has operated
without any trouble for 5 seconds, the genset is started.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 83/153
4.7 Configuratio n of the Emergency Power Operation [N2PB/NEB]

NOTE

The emergency power operation is only possible for synchronous generators with 2 power circuit
breakers.

Configure Configuration of the emergency power YES/NO


emerg.run YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

Emergency power Emergency power operation ON/OFF


ON ON ........... If the device is set to the operating mode "AUTOMATIC" or"TEST" and
there is a power failure, the genset is started and an automatic emer-
gency power operation is carried out. The subsequent masks of this op-
tion are displayed.Emergency power is also triggered via the detection of
a switch fault when the MCB is switched on. Additionally, the mask "MCB
monitoring" has to be set to "ON".
OFF.......... Emergency power operation is not effected, and the subsequent masks
of this option are not displayed.

ATTENTION

Emergency power operation in accordance with DIN VDE 0108 is not therefore possible in the
power circuit breaker logic."EXTERNAL"

Emergency power Start delay emergency power operation 0.5..99.9 s


start delay00.0s To trigger the start of a genset and the emergency power operation, it is necessary
that there has been a mains failure for minimum period of time. The settings are
made here determining how long the mains must have failed without interruption,
before an emergency power operation is carried out.

Mains settling Mains settling time 0..999 s


time 000s In order to prevent the backspacing synchronization of the generator with the mains
for a certain period of time following the detection of the return of the mains after a
power failure, the time lag for the isolated operation (in parallel with other gensets)
can be selected with the input of this parameter. The following applies for devices
which are operated with one power circuit breaker [e.g. N1PB]: In the event of a
power failure for a certain period of time, the genset remains in no-load operation
with the starting request applied, until after the mains settling time following the re-
turn of the mains.In this case, the starting request (via terminal 3/5) may be removed
by a programmable relay which is activated due to the mains failure (parameter 5).

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 84/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.8 Configuratio n of the Monitors

Configure Configuration of the monitors YES/NO


monitoring YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

4.8.1 Monitoring o f the Generator Performance


It is possible to monitor a generator performance for the exceeding of two parame-
terizable quantities. Via the relay manager (parameter 56) it is possible to trigger one
of the freely parameterizable relays. A load switch-off is therefore possible by means
of an external circuit.

NOTE With this function, no output of a centralized alarm is made, nor does a message
appear on the display. There only is a relay output which has to be evaluated exter-
nally.

ATTENTION

This function does not serve as a generator protection. If a generator protection should be carried
out, this has to be effected by an external circuit.

Gen.power monit. Monitoring of the generator performance ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The generator performance is monitored for the exceeding of two freely
parameterizable quantities. For an output to be triggered, the following
quantities must be set in the relay manager: Step 1 = 56; Step 2 = 80.
The subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Power monitoring Threshold performance monitoring, step 1 0..150 %


resp.value 000% A value is set here as a threshold for the monitor to respond. If this value is ex-
ceeded, the relay assigned via the relay manager (param. 56) picks up.

Power monitoring Hysteresis performance monitoring, step 1 100 %


gen.hyst. 000% If the threshold is fallen below by the value of the hysteresis, this relay drops off
again.

power monit.gen. Delay power monitoring, step 1 0..999 s


Delay time 000s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 85/153
4.8.2 Mains Powe r Monitoring [NxPB]
It is possible to monitor the mains power for the exceeding of one parameterizable
value. Via the relay manager (parameter 67) it is possible to trigger one of the freely
parameterizable relays. A load switch-off is therefore possible by means of an exter-
nal circuit.

NOTE With this function, no output of a centralized alarm is made, nor does a message
appear on the display. There only is a relay output which has to be evaluated exter-
nally.

ATTENTION

This function does not serve as a generator protection. If a generator protection should be carried
out, it has to be effected by an external circuit.

mains power mon. Monitoring of the mains power ON/OFF


ON ON ........... Turn-on of the mains power monitoring. A relay must be assigned to the
parameter 56 of the relay manager. The subsequent masks of this option
are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

mains power mon. Threshold performance monitoring B/L 0..9,999 kW


value B0000kW A value is set here as a threshold for the monitor to respond. If this value is ex-
ceeded, the corresponding relay picks up. The input of the incoming power is
marked with an "-", and the input of an outgoing power is marked with a "+" before
the value. If you save this value, the "-" becomes a "B" and the "+" becomes a "L".

mains power mon. Hysteresis power monitoring 0..999 kW


hyst. 000kW If the threshold is fallen below by the value of the hysteresis, this relay drops off
again.

mains power mon. Delay power monitoring 0..999 s


Delay time 000s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

4.8.3 Generator O verload Monitoring

Overload monit. Monitoring of the generator overload ON/OFF


ON ON ........... Turn-on of the generator overload monitoring. The subsequent masks of
this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Gen.overload MOP Threshold generator overload monitoring 80..150 %


resp.value 000% The threshold refers to the set rated power of the generator (see page 56). The trip-
ping is effected without any delay (NPB..operation in parallel with the mains).
Generator overload ................... Tripping, if the generator active load exceeds the
limiting value.

Tripping of fault class 2


without power reduction

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 86/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
a.) Synchronous Generators

Gen.overload IOP Threshold generator overload monitoring 80..150 %


resp.value 000% The threshold refers to the set rated power of the generator (see page 56)
(IPB..isolated operation in parallel with other gensets).
Generator overload ................... Tripping, if the generator active load exceeds the
limiting value.

Tripping of fault class 2


without power reduction

Gen.overload IOP Delay of the generator overload monitoring 0..99 s


delay 00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask (IPB..isolated operation in parallel with
other gensets).

b.) Asynchronous Generators

Gen.overload MOP Delay of the generator overload monitoring 0..99 s


delay 00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask (NPB..ioperation in parallel with the mains).

4.8.4 Generator Re verse power /Reduced Power Protection

Rev./red.power Reverse power-/reduced power monitoring ON/OFF


monitoring ON ON ........... Turn-on of the reverse power or reduced power monitoring. The subse-
quent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Rev./red.power Threshold reverse/reduced power monitoring +99..0..-99 %


resp.value -00% The threshold refers to the set rated power of the generator (see page 56).
Reduced power monitoring ...... Tripping, if the active load falls below the (positive)
limiting value.
Reverse power monitoring........ Tripping, if the direction of the active load is re-
versed and the (negative) limiting value is fallen
below.

Tripping of fault class 3

Rev./red.power Delay reverse power monitoring 0.0..9.9 s


delay 0,0s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 87/153
4.8.5 Load Imbala nce Monitoring
The percentage value of the threshold indicates the admissible deviation of a con-
ductor current from the arithmetic mean value of all three wire currents. In the event
that a load imbalance of the generator occurs, the genset is immediately shut down
with the error class 3, and the fault message "load imbalance" is displayed.

Load unbalanced Load imbalance monitoring ON/OFF


monitoring ON ON ........... The generator load imbalance is monitored. The subsequent masks of
this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Load unbalanced Maximum admissible load imbalance 0..100 %


max. 000% The monitoring of the set maximum load imbalance refers to the set generator cur-
rent (see page 56). If the value of the load imbalance exceeds the set percentage
value, which may occur for instance due to an asymmetric load of the generator, the
generator is switched off.

Tripping of fault class 3

Example 1 Irated = 100 A


Iimbalance = set to 33 %
The monitor responds, if the difference between a phase and the arithmetic mean
value of all three phases is (100 A × 33 %)/100 % = 33.3 A. The arithmetic mean
value of all three phases is calculated by: 33.3 A × 3 = 100 A. In case of an error
(one phase defectuous) the two remaining phases take over 100 A each. The current
within the two remaining phases is calculated as follows: 100 A/2 phases = 50 A per
healthy phase.
Reading on the display 50/50/0; 70/30/0; 45/55/0; etc.

Example 2 Irated = 100 A


Iimbalance = set to 90 %
- (100 A × 90 %)/100 % = 90 A
- 90 A × 3 = 270 A
270 A/2 phases = 135 A per healthy phase.
Indication on the display 135/135/0; 130/140/0; 120/150/0; etc.

Load unbalanced Delay of the load imbalance monitoring 0.02..99.98 s


delay 00.00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded for at least the period of time
specified in this mask.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 88/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.8.6 Generator O vercurrent Monitoring
In the event that an overcurrent of the generator occurs, the genset is immediately
shut down with the error class 3, and the fault message "overcurrent" is displayed.

I [% ]

I >>
(I2)

I>
(I1)

t2 t1 t [s]

Gen.overcurrent Independent time-overcurrent protection UMZ ON/OFF


monitoring ON ON ........... The generator current is monitored, and the subsequent masks of this
option are displayed
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Gen.overcurrent Threshold generator overcurrent 0..300 %


limit 1 000% If the value of the generator current exceeds the set percentage value referring to
the rated generator power (see page 56), the generator is switched off.

Tripping of fault class 3

Gen.overcurrent Delay of the overcurrent monitoring 0.02..99.98 s


delay 1 00.00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

Gen.overcurrent Threshold generator overcurrent 0..300 %


limit 2 000% If the value of the generator current exceeds the set percentage value referring to
the rated generator power (see page 56), the generator is switched off.

Tripping of fault class 3

Gen.overcurrent Delay of the overcurrent monitoring 0.02..99.98 s


delay 2 00.00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 89/153
4.8.7 Generator F requency Monitoring
Function "Generator frequency not within the admissible range"
The generator frequency is not within the set limiting values for the over- and under-
frequency respectively. The genset is immediately shut down (error class 3), and the
fault messages "Gen.overfreq." or "Gen.underfreq."appear.

The activation of the monitoring for generator underfrequency is delayed via the "de-
layed monitoring", in order to enable a trouble-free start of the generator.

Gen.frequency- Monitoring of the generator frequency ON/OFF


Monitoring ON ON ........... The generator frequency is monitored. The generator frequency is
monitored for over and underfrequency respectively. The subsequent
masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Gen. overfreq. Threshold generator over frequency 40.0..85.0 Hz


f > 00.00Hz The value of the overfrequency to be monitored, is set in this mask. After this value
is reached or even exceeded, the device outputs a message and opens the gen-
erator power circuit breaker.

Tripping of fault class 3

Gen. overfreq. Pickup delay generator over frequency 0.02..9.98 s


delay 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

Gen. underfreq. Threshold generator underfrequency 40.0..85.0 Hz


f < 00.00Hz The value of the underfrequency to be monitored, is set in this mask. After this value
is reached or ffallen below, the device outputs a message and opens the generator
power circuit breaker.

Tripping of fault class 3

Gen. underfreq. Pickup delay generator underfrequency 0.02..9.98 s


delay 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

a.) Engine Speed Monitoring

Motor over speed Genset overspeed monitoring at 0..9,999 rpm


> 0000 rpm The overspeed monitoring is carried out via a pickup, irrespective of the generator
frequency monitoring. If the pickup input is switched off, this monitoring is also deac-
tivated. An output of the fault message "overspeed" is made.

Tripping of fault class 3

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 90/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.8.8 Generator V oltage Monitoring
Each phase-to-phase voltage is monitored.

Function "Generator voltage not within the admissible range"


At least one phase of the generator voltage is not within the set limiting values for the
over and undervoltage respectively. The genset is immediately shut down (error
class 3), and the fault messages "Gen.overvolt." or "Gen.undervolt." appear.The acti-
vation of the monitoring for generator undervoltage is delayed via the "delayed
monitoring", in order to enable a trouble-free start of the generator.

Gen.voltage- Monitoring of the generator voltage ON/OFF


Monitoring ON ON ........... The generator voltage is monitored. The generator voltage is monitored
for over- and underfrequency respectively. The subsequent masks of this
option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Gen.overvoltage Threshold generator overvoltage [1] 70..130 V; [4] 10..520 V


U > 000V The value of the overvoltage to be monitored, is set in this mask. After this value is
reached or even exceeded, the device outputs a message and opens the generator
power circuit breaker.

Tripping of fault class 3

Gen. overvoltage Pickup delay generator overvoltage 0.02..9.98 s


delay 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

Gen.undervoltage Threshold generator undervoltage [1] 70..130 V; [4] 10..520 V


U < 000V The value of the undervoltage to be monitored, is set in this mask. After this value is
reached or ffallen below, the device outputs a message and opens the generator
power circuit breaker.

Tripping of fault class 3

Gen.undervoltage Pickup delay generator undervoltage 0.02..9.98 s


Delay time 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 91/153
4.8.9 Mains Frequ ency Monitoring
The monitoring of the mains frequency is mandatory if a generator is operated with
the public mains. In case of a mains failure (e. g. short interruption of power supply)
the generator working in parallel with the mains must be automatically disconnected
from the mains. The mains decoupling is only activated, if both power circuit breakers
(mains and generator power circuit breaker) are closed.

Function "Mains frequency not within the admissible range"


The mains frequency is not within the set limiting values for the over- and underfre-
quency respectively. The power circuit breaker which is meant to effect the mains
decoupling, is opened immediately. The prerequisite for the mains frequency moni-
toring is the operation in parallel with the mains (both power circuit breakers closed).
The fault message "mains overfreq." or"mains underfreq" appear.
Mains frequency Monitoring of the mains frequency ON/OFF
Monitoring ON ON ........... The mains frequency is monitored. The mains frequency is monitored for
over and underfrequency respectively. The subsequent masks of this
option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Mains overfreq. Threshold mains overfrequency 40.0..70.0 Hz


f > 00,00Hz The value of the overfrequency to be monitored, is set in this mask. If the value is
reached or even exceeded, the device outputs a message and, depending on the
type of the mains decoupling, opens the generator- and the mains power circuit
breaker respectively.

Tripping of fault class 0

Mains overfreq. Pickup delay mains over frequency 0.02..9.98 s


Delay time 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

Mains underfreq. Threshold mains underfrequency 40.0..70.0 Hz


f < 00,00Hz The value of the underfrequency to be monitored, is set in this mask. If the value is
reached or fallen below, the device outputs a message and, depending on the type
of the mains decoupling, opens the generator- and the mains power circuit breaker
respectively.

Tripping of fault class 0

Mains underfreq. Pickup delay mains underfrequency 0.02..9.98 s


Delay time 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 92/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.8.10 Generator V oltage Monitoring
The monitoring of the mains voltage is mandatory if a generator is operated with the
public mains. In case of a mains failure (e. g. short interruption of power supply) the
generator working in parallel with the mains must be automatically disconnected from
the mains.

Each phase-to-phase voltage is monitored.

Function "Mains voltage not within the admissible range"


At least one phase of the mains voltage is not within the set limiting values for the
over and undervoltage respectively. The power circuit breaker which is meant to ef-
fect the mains decoupling, is opened immediately. The prerequisite for the mains
voltage monitoring is the operation in parallel with the mains (both power circuit
breakers closed). The fault message "mains overvolt." or"mains undervolt" appear.

Mains voltage Monitoring of the mains voltage ON/OFF


Monitoring ON ON ........... The mains voltage is monitored. The mains voltage is monitored for over-
and underfrequency respectively. The subsequent masks of this option
are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Mains overvolt. Threshold mains overvoltage [1] 20..130 V; [4] 20..520 V


U > 000V The value of the overvoltage to be monitored, is set in this mask. If the value is
reached or even exceeded, the device outputs a message and, depending on the
type of the mains decoupling, opens the generator- and the mains power circuit
breaker respectively.

Tripping of fault class 0

Mains overvolt. Pickup delay mains overvoltage 0.02..9.98 s


Delay time 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

Mains undervolt. Threshold mains undervoltage [1] 20..130 V; [4] 20..520 V


U < 000V The value of the undervoltage to be monitored, is set in this mask. If the value is
reached or fallen below, the device outputs a message and, depending on the type
of the mains decoupling, opens the generator- and the mains power circuit breaker
respectively.

Tripping of fault class 0

Mains undervolt. Pickup delay mains undervoltage 0.02..9.98 s


Delay time 0,00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 93/153
4.8.11 Phase Shift Monitoring
Function A phase shift is a sudden variation of the voltage curve and can be invoked by a
major load change of a generator. In this case, a single change of a cycle duration is
detected by the measuring circuit. The change of the cycle duration is then compared
with a calculated mean value from previous measurements. The monitoring is three-
phased. The threshold in degrees indicates the time difference between mean value
and instantaneous value, referring to a full period. The settings for the monitoring
may vary. The phase shift monitor may be used as an additional device for the mains
decoupling.

Phase shifting Phase shift monitoring ON/OFF


Monitoring ON ON ........... The mains frequency is monitored, and a phase shift is registered within
the defined range. The subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... There is no monitoring, and the subsequent masks of this option are not
displayed.

Monitoring Phase shift monitoring single-/three..only three-phase


only three-phase ON .........................In case of a single phase monitoring of the voltage for a phase
shift, tripping is released if the phase shift exceeds the set
threshold in at least one of the three phases. Note: If a phase
shift occurs in one or two phases, the single-phase threshold is
considered; if a phase shift occurs in all three phases, the three-
phase threshold is considered; This kind of monitoring is very
sensitive and may lead to false trippings, if the settings for the
phase angle are too small.
Only three-phase..In case of a three-phase monitoring of the voltage for a phase
shift, a tripping is only released, if the phase shift exceeds the
set threshold in all three phases within 2 periods.

Tripping of fault class 0

NOTE

If the monitoring is set to "only three-phase", only the lower of the two subsequent masks is
visible; if the monitoring is set to "single-/three-phase", both parameterization masks are
visible.

Phase shifting Maximum phase difference 3..30 °


(One phase) 00° A tripping occurs, if the electrical angle of the voltage curve shifts by more than the
This mask is only visible, if set angle. A tripping depends on the kind of monitoring which has been selected:
the monitoring is set to
"on".

Phase shifting Maximum phase difference 3..30 °


(3-phase) 00° A tripping occurs, if the electrical angle of the voltage curve shifts by more than the
set angle. A tripping depends on the kind of monitoring which has been selected:

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 94/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.8.12 Battery Volta ge Monitoring

Batt. undervolt. Threshold battery undervoltage 10.0..35.0 V


U < 00,0V Threshold of the battery undervoltage. A continuous negative deviation of the set
limiting value for at least x seconds (see next mask) leads to an output of the fault
message "Batt. undervolt." on the LC-display and, to the output of the centralized
alarm.

Tripping of fault class 1

Batt. undervolt. Delay battery undervoltage 0..99 s


Delay 00s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be fallen below without interruption for at
least the period of time specified in this mask.

Note: The readiness for operation is taken back irrespective of the set battery
voltage monitor, and the message "Battery undervolt." is output, if
• the supply voltage falls below 8 V or if

4.9 Configuratio n of Digital Inputs

Configure Configuration of the digital inputs YES/NO


dig.inputs YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 95/153
4.9.1 Setting of th e Digital Inputs
Digital input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E
Terminal
Function Fault input

NOTE

Operating current........... After the tripping, the relay picks up, i. e. current is flowing through the
coil while in operate condition.
Æ In the event of a loss of the supply voltage, the status of the relay is
not changed and no tripping occurs. In this case, the readiness for
operation of the relay should be monitored.

Closed-circuit current.... After the tripping, the relay drops off, i. e. current is flowing through the
coil while in release condition. The relay is picked up while in release
condition (= no tripping).
Æ In the event of a loss of the supply voltage, the status of the relay is
changed and a tripping occurs.

24 V 24 V
O perating current Idle-current
contact contact
R E LE A S E R E LE A S E
Idle-current O perating current
contact no curre nt flo w contact
curren t flo w

RELEASE RELEASE
R e la y op era tes R e la y relea ses

0V 0V

Example Digital inputs 1 to 4 (same procedure for the inputs 5-16)

Dig. input 1234 Function of the digital error inputs 1 - 4 R/A


function AAAA The error inputs may be tripped by an operating or closed-circuit contact. The
closed-circuit input enables the monitoring for a wire break. Either a positive or a
negative voltage difference may be applied. The terminals 34 (input 1), 35 (input 2),
36 (input 3) and 61 (input 4) are assigned.
A ............. Operating current input: The digital error input is tripped because a volt-
age difference is applied.
R ............. Closed-circuit input: The digital error input is tripped because the
voltage difference drops off.

Dig. input 1234 Time lag of the digital error inputs 1 - 4 0..9
Delay 0000 A time lag can be assigned to each error input. The time lag is entered in the form of
delay steps. The individual steps are listed below. For a tripping to occur, the input
must be present without interruption for the set time lag.

Delay step Time lag


0 100 ms
1 200 ms
2 500 ms
3 1S
4 2s
5 5S
6 10 s
7 20 S
8 50 s
9 100 s

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 96/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Delayed by 1234 Delay due to the engine speed of the dig. error inputs 1 - 4 Y/N
eng.speed YYYY For the inputs 1 to 4, it is indicated here whether the error input should be monitored
only after the machine is rotating ("ignition speed reached").
Y .............. Following the activation of the engine monitoring, (the green LED "moni-
toring" lights up), the digital input is evaluated.
N .............. The digital input is always evaluated.

Dig. input 1234 Error class of the digital error inputs 1 - 4 0..3
Failclass 3000 Different error classes are assigned to the digital error inputs 1 to 4. The error
classes are listed below.

The monitoring functions are divided into four error classes:

F0 Warning error This error does not cause an interruption of the operation. An output is made without
centralized alarm.
Æ Error text display
F1 Warning error This error does not cause an interruption of the operation. Output of the centralized
alarm.
Æ Error text + blinking LED "error" + relay centralized alarm (horn).
F2 Reacting error This error causes a shutoff of the driving genset. Prior to opening the GCB, the active
load is first reduced, followed by a coasting.
Æ Error text + blinking LED "error" + relay centralized alarm (horn) + settle.
F3 Reacting error This error causes an immediate opening of the power circuit breaker as well as the
shutdown of the driving genset.
Æ Error text + blinking LED "error" + relay centralized alarm (horn)+ switching-off.

4.9.2 Denominatio n of the Digital Inputs

NOTE

If the terminal 6 is assigned with the function "sprinkler operation" (see chapter 4.9.3 "Setting the
Function of Terminal 6 " on page 98) or if a gas engine is selected (see chapter 4.12.2
"Determination of the Engine Type " on page 110), the EMERGENCY-OFF function must always be
assigned to the terminal 61.
If the terminal 61 is not designed as a digital input, the digital input with the smallest terminal
number is given the special function EMERGENCY-OFF (usually, this digital input is then the input
with the terminal number 61).

Example Error text terminal 61

alarmtext ter.61 Setting the fault texts for terminals 34..36 and 61..73
EMERGENCY OFF The input of the error texts is made in these masks. The texts for the terminals 61 to
73 are entered (in this example, this is the error text "EMERGENCY OFF"for the
terminal 61). Please make sure to generally assign the terminal 61 with the E-OFF
function.

NOTE

Some special symbols, numbers, capital and small initial letters may be set.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 97/153
4.9.3 Setting the F unction of Terminal 6

ATTENTION

The various functions of the terminal 6 are activated at different signal levels!

Function term.6: Function of terminal 6


Sprinkler In this mask, a function is assigned to the digital control input with the terminal 6.
The following functions may be selected:
• sprinkler operation,
• engine release,
• external acknowledgement,
• start without CB.

• Sprinkler By resetting the terminal 6 (application of a Low-level) the sprinkler operation is activated
according to the description of functions. This is terminated by setting terminal 6 (application of
a High signal). Attention: Negative functional logic! (For the function of the sprinkler operation
please also refer to the chapter 2.12 "Sprinkler Operation" on page 36.)

• Motor release Here, the terminal 6 has the same function as the STOP-button: Resetting the terminal 6 (appli-
cation of a LOW-level) avoids that the engine is started and stops a genset which is already
running; the application of a HIGH-level releases the start of the genset. Attention: Via this
function, emergency power operation is also prevented or aborted. Emergency power is not
possible without this release signal! The motor release function is only possible in "AUTO-
MATIC" operating mode.

• ext. acknowledge While in the operationg modes "STOP" and "AUTOMATIC" external errors may be acknowl-
edged by setting the terminal 6 (change of slope from a LOW- to a HIGH-level). In order to
achieve further acknowledgment, terminal 6 must accordingly first be reset and then set again.
If a continuous HIGH signal is present at terminal 6, this has no effect on the acknowledgment
and suppression of fault messages.

• no CB by start If the terminal 6 is set, the genset starts, no synchronization is carried out and the generator
power circuit breaker is not switched on (no switching to the black busbar). The PCB is only
switched on in case of emergency current. After the return of the mains the transfer to the mains
is carried out according to the preset switch logic. The start via the terminal 6 is more significant
than the start via the terminals 3/5. If terminal 6 was selected, the terminals 3/5 are ignored. If,
for the circuit breaker logic "Parallel", the genset is set to operation parallel with the mains, and
if the terminal 6 is activated, the GCB is opened after a power reduction. The genset keeps on
running in no-load operation with the GCB open. By deactivating the terminal 6 the genset is
shut down without coasting.

Operating condition Possible


emerg. power Terminal 6 Automatic 1 Automatic 2 function:
0 1 x x Start without CB
0 0 1 x Automatic 1
0 0 0 1 Automatic 2
1 x x x emerg. power

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 98/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.10 Configuratio n of the Analog Inputs (Option T4)

Configure Configuration of the analog inputs YES/NO


analg.input YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

Temperature in: Temperature measurement in Celsius / Fahrenheit


------- In this mask a decision is made whether the temperature measurement of the ana-
log inputs should be in °C or in °F. This applies only to Pt100-measuring inputs
(special function).

4.10.1 Setting of th e Analog Inputs


NOTE The analog inputs 1 to 4 are only present, if the option T4 (four inputs) is available.
The following executions of the inputs are possible: Scaleable analog input (e. g.
0..20 mA), Pt100-input, Pt1000-input, VDO-input (Analog or temperature) and PTC-
input.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 99/153
a.) Pt100 Input

The resistor input Pt100 is designed for temperatures of up to 240 °C. A name can
be assigned to each Pt100-input. Each input is indicated by its name and can be
monitored in two steps. The first step causes the tripping of the error class 1, the
second step the tripping of the error class 3.

Example temperature 3:

Temperature 3 Turn on-/off of the Pt100-input ON/OFF


Pt100 ON ON ........... The temperature indication of this input appears, the temperature moni-
toring is turned on. The subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... No indication or monitoring are carried out, and the subsequent masks of
this option are not displayed.

NOTE

The maximum length of the used space must not exceed 11 characters, starting from the sixth
position from the left.

***name**** Denomination of the analog input characters [at your choice]


°°°°°°°°°°°000xx The temperature input 3 is assigned with a freely selectable name with a maximum
of 11 characters. In the event of an error, the name is displayed with the tripping
temperature, with an exclamation mark before the temperature.

limit Limiting value "warning" 0..255 °C / 0..490 °F


warning 000xx In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a warning is output.

Tripping of fault class 1

limit Limiting value "tripping" 0..255 °C / 0..490 °F


shutdown 000xx In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a tripping occurs.

Tripping of fault class 3

Delay Time lag for limiting value "warning" and "tripping" 0..999 s
limit 1/2 000s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded of fallen below without inter-
ruption for at least the period of time specified in this mask. If the actual value ex-
ceeds or falls below the threshold within this period of time, the time lag is re-started
(this time lag applies for both limiting values).

Monitoring for Monitoring for... high limit mon./low limit mon.


high limit mon. There are different kinds of monitoring of the temperature input 3:
high limit mon..... ...... The set value must be exceeded;
low limit mon.. ........... The set value must be fallen below.

NOTE

If the monitoring of the temperature limiting values is not necessary, a limiting value has to be set in
the corresponding mask, which is higher than the expected temperature (e. g. for the ambient
temperature: 100 °C).

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 100/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
b.) Pt1000 Input

The resistor input Pt1000 is designed for temperatures of up to 200 °C. A name can
be assigned to each Pt1000-input. Each input is indicated with a name and can be
monitored in two steps. The first step causes the tripping of the error class 1, the
second step the tripping of the error class 3.

Example Temperature 4:

Temperature 4 Turn on-/off of the Pt1000-input ON/OFF


Pt1000 ON ON ........... The temperature indication of this input appears, the temperature moni-
toring is turned on. The subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... No indication or monitoring are carried out, and the subsequent masks of
this option are not displayed.

NOTE

The maximum length of the used space must not exceed 11 characters, starting from the sixth
position from the left.

***name**** Denomination of the analog input characters [at your choice]


°°°°°°°°°°°000°C The temperature input 4 is assigned with a freely selectable name with a maximum
of 11 characters. In the event of an error, the name is displayed with the tripping
temperature, with an exclamation mark before the temperature.

limit Limiting value "warning" 0..255 °C /..°F


warning 000°C In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a warning is output.

Tripping of fault class 1

limit Limiting value "tripping" 0..255 °C /..°F


shutdown 000°C In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a tripping occurs.

Tripping of fault class 3

Delay Time lag for limiting value "warning" and "tripping" 0..999 s
limit 1/2 000s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded of fallen below without inter-
ruption for at least the period of time specified in this mask. If the actual value ex-
ceeds or falls below the threshold within this period of time, the time lag is re-started
(this time lag applies for both limiting values).

Monitoring for Monitoring for... high limit mon./low limit mon.


high limit mon. There are different kinds of monitoring of the temperature input 4:
high limit mon.... ....... The set value must be exceeded;
low limit mon.. ........... The set value must be fallen below.

NOTE

If the monitoring of the temperature limiting values is not necessary, a limiting value has to be set in
the corresponding mask, which is higher than the expected temperature (e. g. for the ambient
temperature: 100°C).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 101/153
c.) PTC Input

The PTC-input is designed for resistance values. A name can be assigned to each
PTC input. Each input is indicated with a name and can be monitored in two steps.
The first step causes the tripping of the error class 1, the second step the tripping of
the error class 3.

Example PTC input 3

Analog input 3 Generator temperature monitoring via PTC ON/OFF


PTC ON ON ........... The temperature of the generator is monitored via a PTC-resistor. The
subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... The monitoring of the generator temperature is switched off, and the
subsequent masks of this option are not displayed.

NOTE

The maximum length of the used space must not exceed 11 characters, starting from the sixth
position from the left.

Name and unit Denomination of the analog inputs freely selectable


°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° In this mask, the denomination of the input is freely selectable. A maximum of four
zero characters can be used for the space reservation of the measuring values. The
free variable parameters may be interrupted by any character, e. g. a comma. The
measuring values will appear where the zeros had been positioned.

limit warning Limiting value: "warning" 0..100 %


value 000% In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a warning is output.

Tripping of fault class 1

limit shutdown Limiting value "tripping" 0..100 %


value 000% In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a tripping occurs.

Tripping of fault class 3

Delay Time lag for limiting value "warning" and "tripping" 0..999 s
limit 1/2 000s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded of fallen below without inter-
ruption for at least the period of time specified in this mask. If the actual value ex-
ceeds or falls below the threshold within this period of time, the time lag is re-started
(this time lag applies for both limiting values).

Monitoring for Monitoring for... high limit mon./low limit mon.


high limit mon. There are different kinds of monitoring of the scaleable analog input 3:
high limit mon.. ......... The set value must be exceeded;
low limit mon.. ........... The set value must be fallen below.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 102/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
d.) VDO-Temperature Input

The VDO input is set for the sensor 323,805/001/001 (0..380 Ω, 40..120 °C). A name
can be assigned to each VDO input. The input is indicated by its name and can be
monitored in two steps. The first step causes the tripping of the error class 1, the
second step the tripping of the error class 3.

Example VDO input 5, temperature:

Analog input 5 Generator temperature monitoring via VDO ON/OFF


VDO Temp. ON ON ........... The temperature of the generator is monitored via a VDO-resistor. The
subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... The monitoring of the generator temperature is switched off, and the
subsequent masks of this option are not displayed.

NOTE

The maximum length of the used space must not exceed 11 characters, starting from the sixth
position from the left.

Name and unit Denomination of the analog inputs freely selectable


°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° In this mask, the denomination of the input is freely selectable. A maximum of four
zero characters can be used for the space reservation of the measuring values.The
free variable parameters may be interrupted by any character, e. g. a comma. The
measuring values will appear where the zeros had been positioned.

limit Limiting value "warning" 0..150 °C /..°F


warning 000°C In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a warning is output.

Tripping of fault class 1

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 103/153
limit Limiting value "tripping" 0..150 °C /..°F
shutdown 000°C In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a tripping occurs.

Tripping of fault class 3

Delay Time lag for limiting value "warning" and "tripping" 0..999 s
limit 1/2 000s
For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded of fallen below without inter-
ruption for at least the period of time specified in this mask. If the actual value ex-
ceeds or falls below the threshold within this period of time, the time lag is re-started
(this time lag applies for both limiting values).

Monitoring for Monitoring for... high limit mon./low limit mon.


high limit mon. There are different kinds of monitoring of the scaleable analog input 5:
high limit mon. .......... The set value must be exceeded;
low limit mon.. ........... The set value must be fallen below.

e.) VDO Pressure Input

A name can be assigned to each VDO input. Each analog input is indicated by its
name and can be monitored in two steps. The first step causes the tripping of the er-
ror class 1, the second step the tripping of the error class 3.

Example VDO input 5, pressure:

Analog input 6 VDO analog input 6 ON/OFF


VDO Press. ON ON ........... The indication of this input appears, the monitoring is turned on. The
subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... No indication or monitoring are carried out, and the subsequent masks of
this option are not displayed.

NOTE

The maximum length of the used space must not exceed 11 characters, starting from the sixth
position from the left.

Name and unit Denomination of the analog inputs freely selectable


°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° In this mask, the denomination of the input is freely selectable. A maximum of four
zero characters can be used for the space reservation of the measuring values.The
free variable parameters may be interrupted by any character, e. g. a comma. The
measuring values will appear where the zeros had been positioned.

Pressure in VDO analog input 6 bar/psi


bar The unit of measurement for the analog input may be switched over from"bar"to
[optional] "psi". The conversion factors are as follows: 1 psi = 14.5 bar.
bar ........... The measuring values are monitored and indicated in bar.
psi............ The measuring values are monitored and indicated in psi.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 104/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
e.1) Measuring Unit "bar" (Optional)

analog input 6 VDO analog input 0-5 / 0-10bar


VDO 0-5bar The measuring range of the analog input can be switched over.
0-5 bar ..... The measuring input 0..180 Ohm corresponds to measuring values of
0..5 bar.
0-10 bar ... The measuring input 0..180 Ohm corresponds to measuring values of
0..10 bar.

Limit warning Limiting value "warning" VDO analog input 0.0..10.0 bar
value 00.0bar In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a F1-tripping occurs.

Limit shutdown Limiting value "warning" VDO analog input 0.0..10.0 bar
value 00.0bar In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a F3-tripping occurs.

e.2) Unit of Measurement "psi"

Analog input 6 VDO analog input 0-73 / 0-145 psi


VDO 0-73psi The measuring range of the analog input can be switched over.
0-73 psi ... The measuring input 0..180 Ohm corresponds to measuring values of
0..73 psi.
0-145 psi . The measuring input 0..180 Ohm corresponds to measuring values of
0..145 psi.

Limit warning Limiting value "warning" VDO analog input 0.0..145.0 psi
value 000.0psi In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a F1-tripping occurs.

Limit shutdown Limiting value "tripping" VDO analog input 0.0..145.0 psi
value 000.0psi In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a F3-tripping occurs.

e.3) Units of Measurement "bar" and "psi"

Delay Time lag for limiting values WARNING and Switching-off 0..999 s
limit 1/2 000s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded of fallen below without inter-
ruption for at least the period of time specified in this mask. If the actual value ex-
ceeds or falls below the threshold within this period of time, the time count is re-
started (this time lag applies for both limiting values).

Monitoring for Monitoring for .. high limit mon./low limit mon.


high limit mon. There are different kinds of monitoring of the VDO analog input:
high limit mon. .......... The set value must be exceeded;
low limit mon............. The set value must be fallen below.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 105/153
f.) Scaleable Analog Input 0/4..20 mA

The 0/4..20 mA-values can be read-in here. The input can be assigned with a name
and a unit. Each analog input is indicated by its name and can be monitored in two
steps. The first step causes the tripping of the error class 1, the second step the trip-
ping of the Error class 3.

Example Scaleable analog input 5:

Analog input 5 Scaleable analog input ON/OFF


scalable ON ON ........... The indication of this input appears, the monitoring is turned on. The
subsequent masks of this option are displayed.
OFF.......... No indication or monitoring are carried out, and the subsequent masks of
this option are not displayed.

NOTE

The maximum length of the used space must not exceed 11 characters, starting from the sixth
position from the left.

Name and unit Denomination of the analog inputs freely selectable


°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°° In this mask, the denomination of the input is freely selectable. A maximum of four
zero characters can be used for the space reservation of the measuring values.The
free variable parameters may be interrupted by any character, e. g. a comma. The
measuring values will appear where the zeros had been positioned.

analog input 5 Measuring range of the analog input 0-20 mA / 4-20mA


0-00mA The measuring ranges 0...20 mA or 4..20 mA are selected in this mask.In the event
that for the setting 4..20 mA, a current less than 2 mA is measured, this is evaluated
as a wire break (see below).

value at Smallest pick-up factor of the analog input -9,999..0..9,999


0% -0000 A numerical value corresponding to the lowest input value, is assigned to the scale-
able analog input. Æ Determination of the lower value (0 %, e. g. 0 kW, 0 V) with the
minimum pick-up factor of the analog input (0 mA or 4 mA).

value at Greatest pick-up factor of the analog input -9,999..0..9,999


100% -0000 A numerical value corresponding to the highest input value, is assigned to the scale-
able analog input. Æ The determination of the upper value (100 %, e. g. 500 kW,
400 V) with the maximum pick-up factor of the analog input (20 mA).
limit warning Limiting value "warning" -9,999..0..9,999
value -0000 In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a warning is output.

Tripping of fault class 1

limit shutdown Limiting value "tripping" -9,999..0..9,999


value -0000 In this mask, the limiting value is entered at which a tripping occurs.

Tripping of fault class 3

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 106/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Delay Time lag for limiting values "warning" and "tripping" 0..999 s
limit 1/2 000s For a tripping to occur, the threshold must be exceeded of fallen below without inter-
ruption for at least the period of time specified in this mask. If the actual value ex-
ceeds or falls below the threshold within this period of time, the time lag is re-started
(this time lag applies for both limiting values).

Monitoring for Monitoring for... high limit mon./low limit mon.


high limit mon. There are different kinds of monitoring of the scaleable analog input 5:
high limit mon. .......... The set value must be exceeded;
low limit mon.. ........... The set value must be fallen below.

4.10.2 Monitoring o f the Measuring Range (Option T4)


Measuring range monitoring
Analog input--.- This message appears if the measuring range is either exceeded or fallen below.
The tripping occurs in dependence of the values indicated below.

NOTE

In the event that a positive deviation of the measuring range (wire break) was detected, and a
tripping occured, the monitoring of the limiting value of this analog input is deactivated.
Monitoring of the measuring range, tripping in case of:
4..20 mA 2 mA (negative deviation)
Pt100 240 °C (positive deviation)
Pt1000 150 °C (positive deviation)
PTC 16 kΩ (positive deviation)
180 Ω VDO, 0..5 Bar 193 Ω (positive deviation)
180 Ω VDO, 0..10 Bar 193 Ω (positive deviation)
380 Ω VDO temperature 400 Ω (no tripping in the event of a wire break)

4.10.3 Time Lag of the Analog Inputs via the Engine Speed

Ana.input 1234 Time lag of the analog measuring inputs 1..4 Y/N
Superv.del. YYYY For the inputs 1 to 4, it is indicated here whether the analog input should be moni-
tored only after the machine is rotating ("ignition speed reached").
Y .............. Following the activation of the engine monitoring, (the green LED "moni-
toring" lights up), the analog input is evaluated.
N .............. The analog input is always evaluated.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 107/153
4.11 Configuratio n of the Outputs

Configure Configuration of the outputs YES/NO


outputs? YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

4.11.1 Analog Outp uts (Option A2)


Via the analog output manager it is possible to assign existing analog outputs to a
special measuring quantity. The output can be made as 0-20 mA- or as
4-20 mA-value. A list with the possible parameters can be found in the annex. Each
quantity is assigned with its own number. The quantity may be scaled by means of
an upper and a lower input value. The inputs may also be signed (for more details,
please read the annex "Analog output manager").

NOTE

A list of the values and setting limits for the analog output manager can be found in the chapter 6.1
"Analog Output Manager (List of Parameters with Explanations)" from page 120.

Possible outputs 120/121 and 122/123

Example analog output 120/121:

Anal.out 120121 Parameter for the analog output 0..22


Parameter 00 The number of the requested measuring quantity output is entered here. A list with
all selectable parameters including output and limiting value ranges can be found in
the annex.

Anal.out 120121 Measuring range of the analog input 0-20 mA / 4-20mA


0-00mA The outputs 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA can be selected.

Anal.out 120121 Scaling of the lower output value 0..9,990


0% 0000 The setting range for the input of the 0 %-value can be found in the annex.

Anal.out 120121 Scaling of the upper output value 0..9,990


100% 0000 The setting range for the input of the 100 %-value can be found in the annex.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 108/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.11.2 Relay Mana ger
The relay manager allows to assign a freely selectable combination of functions to
each relay of the terminals 33..38 and 47..48. For this purpose, each possible func-
tion of the device has been assigned with its own individual number. For each relay,
a text describing the logic condition for the picking up of the relay must be entered in
the parameterising menu. Up to three numbers can participate in a logic operation.
The text must be right-justified and no longer than 11 characters. Incorrect function
numbers or incorrect formula constructions are detected and not accepted by the de-
vice.

NOTE

The list of functions and numbers for the relay manager can be found in the chapter 6.2 "Relay
Manager (List of Parameters with Explanations)" from page 122.

Following please find admissible letters for such kind of texts and their description:
+ ................... OR-Operator (logic function)
 .................. AND-Operator (logic function)
+ ................... NOT-Operator (logic function)
1, 2, 3,........... function numbers
+/ ............... applies "" before "+"

Example Relay picks up if function 22 is applied. ⇒ 22


of logical conditions and Relay picks up if function 22 is not applied. ⇒ - 22
relevant texts Relay picks up if both function 2 and function 27 are applied. ⇒ 2  27
Relay picks up if function 2 or function 27 is applied. ⇒ 2 + 27
Relay picks up if function 5 or function 3 or function 13 is not applied. ⇒ 3 + -5 + 13
Relay picks up if function 4 or 7 or 11 is applied. ⇒ 4 + 7 + 11
Relay picks up if function 4 and function 7 and function 11 are not applied. ⇒ - 4  -7  -11
Relay picks up if function 4 and 7 and 11 are applied. ⇒ 4  7  11
Relay picks up if function 7 and 11 are simultaneously applied or func- ⇒ 4 + 7  11
tion 4 is applied.
Relay picks up if function 4 or function 7 or function 11 is not applied. ⇒ -4 + -7 + -11

NOTE

By entering an unlogic parameter, the input line is deleted.

4.11.3 Programmin g of the Relay Outputs


Example Relay 2

Assignm. relay 2 Programming of the relay outputs 1..5


3+-8+13 Relay 2 picks up, if the logic condition in the second line is given.
Example: 3 + -8 + 13 (OR link)
3 ..... Fault class 3 has occurred
-8 .... "MANUAL" operating mode has not been selected
13 ... "Generator underspeed" fault is present

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 109/153
4.12 Configuratio n of the Engine

Configure Configuration of the engine data YES/NO


engine YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

4.12.1 Auxiliary Op erations

Aux. services Pretravel auxiliary operations (starting preparation) 0..999 s


prerun 000s Prior to each starting process a relay output (relay manager parameter 52) can be
output for a settable time (e. g. opening of a shutter). By setting the relay ouptut, the
message "Pretr. Aux.oper." is additionally indicated on the display. In the operating
mode "MANUAL", this relay output is set immediately. The signal remains active until
going to another operating mode. ATTENTION: In the event of an emergency power
oeprtion, this time lag "aux. oper. pretravel" is not considered. The genset starts im-
mediately.

Aux. services Coasting auxiliary operations (starting preparation) 0..999 s


postrun 000s After each genset coasting a relay output (relay manager parameter 52) can be out-
put for a settable time (e. g. in order to operate a cooling water pump). If going from
the operating mode "MANUAL" to "STOP" or to "AUTOMATIC", without a starting
request, the relay remains set during the coasting time. The message "Coast. Aux.
oper." is indicated on the display.

4.12.2 Determinatio n of the Engine Type

Start-Stop-Logic Start-/Stop-logic for... DIESEL/GAS


for diesel Either a diesel engine or a gas engine can be selected. The starting procedures are
described in the chapter 2.6 "Description Start-/Stop Procedure" from page 22.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 110/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
a.) Start-/Stop-Automatic for Gas Engines

NOTE

The starting procedure for the gas machine is described in the chapter 2.6.2 "Gas Engine" from
page 24. Up to three start attempts are carried out.

min. speed for Minimum speed starter 0..999 rpm


000 rpm Following the firing delay, at least the speed set here must be reached for the relay
"ignition to be set " (parameter 82; provided that the pickup is activated) (also see
the subsequent parameter).

Ignition delay Firing delay of the ignition system 1..99 s


00s When using gas machines, a so-called purging operation may often be required prior
to the start.The firing delay is started by engaging the starter. If, following this time,
the "minimum speed starter" is reached, the ignition is started.

Gasvalve Firing delay of the gas valve 1..99 s


Delay 00s By setting the ignition relay, the gas time lag is started. Following the set time, the
gas valve is set, as long as the speed is still above 150 min-1 (provided that the
pickup is activated). As soon as the ignition speed is reached, this relay remains
locked-up until the standstill of the genset.

Starter time Engagement time: the gas valve is opened 2..99 s


00s If the gas valve is set, it remains set for at least the time specified here. As soon as
the ignition speed is reached, this relay remains locked-up until the standstill of the
genset.

Start pause time Interval between two start attempts 1..99 s


00s Time between each start attempt.

freq. low before Approach idle gas position ON/OFF


start ON If this function is activated with"ON", the output "speed lower" is made for the time
specified below, before the starter is engaged, provided that the device is equipped
with a three-position frequency controller. The idle gas position must either be pro-
tected by an end switch, or the engine potentiometer must be equipped with a fric-
tion clutch. The message "initial state" is indicated on the display. ATTENTION: In
the event of an emergency power operation, the start of the genset is delayed by the
idle gas position.

action time for Approach idle gas position (time) 0..999 s


freq. low 000s The duration of the "speed-lower" output is entered here.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 111/153
b.) Start-/Stop-Automatic for Diesel Engines

NOTE

The starting procedure for the diesel engine is described in the chapter 2.6.1 "Diesel Unit" from
page 22. Up to three start attempts are carried out, up to six start attempts are made while in
sprinkler operation.

Preglow time Preheating time 0..99 s


00s Prior to each start, the diesel engine is preheated during this time.

Starter time Engagement time of the starter 2..99 s


00s Setting of the maximum starting time, in the event that the genset is not starting.

Start pause time Interval between two start attempts 1..99 s


00s Interval between the individual start attempts.

freq. low before Approach idle gas position ON/OFF


start ON If this function is activated with"ON", a permanent signal "speed lower"is output be-
fore the starter is engaged, provided that the device is equipped with a three-position
frequency controller. The idle gas position must either be protected by an end
switch, or the engine potentiometer must be equipped with a friction clutch. The
message "initial state" is indicated on the display. ATTENTION: In the event of an
emergency power operation, the start of the engine is delayed by the idle gas posi-
tion.

action time for Approach idle gas position (time) 0..999 s


freq. low 000s The duration of the "speed-lower" -output is entered here.

Start-Stop-Logic Start-/Stop logic close to stop/open to stop


open to stop open to stop .................... The operating magnet is set prior to each starting proce-
dure. In order to switch off the genset, the operating
magnet is reset.
close to stop.................... In order to switch off the genset, the stopping magnet is
set. The stop magnet remains set for another 30 seconds
following the negative deviation of the ignition speed.

4.12.3 Coasting, D elayed Engine Monitoring and Ignition Speed


a.) Coasting

Cooldown time Coasting time 0..999 s


000s In case of a normal unit shutdown (change to "STOP" mode) or stoppage via a fault
class 2 fault, coasting with frequency control is carried out with the power circuit
breaker open. This time can be set. If coasting has been terminated (coasting time)
but a firing speed is nevertheless detected, the message "Shutoff malfunction" is
output after 30 s.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 112/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
firing speed by Terminal 62 as discrete dynamo input ON/OFF
Term. 62 ON OFF.......... The digital input terminal 62 serves as a standard digital input.
ON ........... The logic to be set applies to the starting procedure:
If the input is set to operating current, the starter is disengaged when a
signal is applied. After the termination of the delayed engine monitoring,
the "operating current" is still programmed, however, internally, the de-
vice switches over to the "closed-circuit current" logic, in order to enable
the generation of an error tripping in the event of a voltage loss (including
set time lag). The same principle, inverted, also applies to the closed-
circuit current tripping. The digital input is programmed for closed-circuit
current, to disengage the starter in the event of a voltage loss. After the
delayed engine monitoring, the digital input is internally set to operating
current and is therefore tripped as soon as voltage is applied.

b.) Delayed motor monitoring

Delayed engine Delayed engine monitoring 1..99 s


monitoring 00s Specified time between reaching the ignitionspeed and the monitoring of the errors
occuring during this time (e. g. oil pressure, generator underfrequency, etc.).

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 113/153
c.) Ignition Speed

Firing speed Ignition speed reached 15..70 Hz


reached: f> 00Hz Setting of the ignition speed: After reaching the ignition speed, the starter is switched
off and the frequency controller takes over the speed regulation.
Note:A logging of the values is only possible up to 15 Hz, even if 5 Hz are indicated.
If the pickup measurement is set to "ON", values up to 5 Hz are logged.

N o m in a l fre q u e n cy

fre q u e n c y [H z ]
G e n e ra to r
M in im u m
fre q u e n c y

P aram eterization m ask A

Monitoring on
at f gen > 00Hz

T im e [s ]

D ela y 2
'O N ' (p a ra m e te riza tio n
m ask B)
1
T im e [s]

1
M o n ito rin g : g e n e ra to r u n d e rvo ltag e , g e n erato r u n d e rfre q ue n cy ,
(g e n e ra to r u n d e rs p e e d ; o n ly o p tio n N ), (re ve rs e/red u ce d p o w er; on ly o p tio n R 1 )

2
In a d d itio n th e "M o n ito ring " L E D is illum in ated

P aram eterization m ask B Monitoring ON


after 00s

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 114/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.12.4 Pickup/Dyna mo/Tachogenerator
The engine speed may be logged either by a pickup, a dynamo or a tachogenerator.

a.) Pickup

Please see the wiring diagram on page 11.

Pickup input Pickup-measurement ON/OFF


ON ON ........... The speed monitoring is effected of the engine is effected via the pickup.
The disengagement of the starter after reaching the ignition speed is ad-
ditionally effected via the pickup-measurement.
OFF.......... The frequency monitoring/-control is effected via the frequency meas-
urement of the generator voltage. The disengagement of the starter after
reaching the ignition speed is also effected via the generator frequency.

nominal speed Generator rated speed 1,000..2,000 rpm


Gen. 1/min 0000 Indicates the rotary speed of the generator at rated speed.

Number of pickup Number of teeth pickup 30..280


teeth 000 The number of pulses per rotation.

Plausibility control
A plausibility control is continuously carried out, comparing the measured electrical
frequency (calculated from the generator voltage) with the measured "mechanical"
speed (calculated from the pickup signal). If the two frequencies are not identical, an
error output is made (Error class 1). It is only activated following the engine time lag.

4.13 Counter Con figuration

Configure Configuration of the counters YES/NO


Counter YES In order to guarantee a fast advance in the very comprehensive parameterizing
masks, various groups of parameters are combined in blocks The selection of "YES"
or "NO" has no effect on whether such functions as the control or monitoring etc. are
carried out or not. The selection only has the following effects:
YES.......... The parameterization masks of the subsequent block are displayed.
They can either be only viewed (button 12 "Selection") or the parameters
can be changed (buttons 14 "Position →", 13 "Digit ↑" or 12 "Selection").
No decision is made as to whether or not the parameters are processed.
NO ........... The parameters of the subsequent block are not displayed and are
therefore skipped.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 115/153
4.13.1 Maintenance Call

Service Interval Maintenance call 0..99,999 h


in 0000h With this mask, it is possible to determine the maintenance interval. After the genset
has been operating for the hours specified in this mask, a maintenance call is output
(Error class 1, "maintenance"). After the message has been acknowledged, the
counter is reset to this value.

NOTE

If maintenance was carried out before the set maintenance call, it is possible to set the counter to
this value as an initial value. To do so, the device must be in code level 1 or 2. For safety reasons,
the counter has to be set following a 2-step procedure. The following procedure applies:
1. Step: Setting and saving of the hours requested until the maintenance call
2. Step: Taking over the saved value by...
• terminating the parameterization mode and changing into the automatic mode,
• visualization of the maintenance call "Hours until maintenance" and by
• depressing the button "digit" for at least 5 seconds.

4.13.2 Operating H ours Counter

NOTE

Running hours can be set to a maximum of 65,000 hours.

Set oper.hours Setting of the running hours counter 0..65,000 h


counter 00000h In this mask it is possible to indicate how many hours the device has already been
runningThis may be for instance necessary, if an old genset is used, or if the present
control is to be replaced by an older one.

NOTE

If a certain number of running hours is to be preset, the device must be on code level 2. For safety
reasons, the counter has to be set following a 2-step procedure. The following procedure applies:
1. Step: Setting and saving of the requested running hours.
2. Step: Taking over the saved value by...
• terminating the parameterization mode and changing into the automatic mode,
• visualization of the running hours and by
• depressing the button "digit" for at least 5 seconds.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 116/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
4.13.3 Start Counte r

NOTE

After 32,000 starts, the counter is reset automatically.

Start counter Setting of the genset start number 0...32,749


set 00000 The start counter can only be adjusted by the maintenance staff of the device! The
start counter indicates how often the genset was already started. After each start
attempt, the start counter is increased by one.

NOTE

If a certain number of genset starts is to be preset, the device must be on code level 2. For safety
reasons, the counter has to be set following a 2-step procedure. The following procedure applies:
1. Step: Setting and saving of the requested genset starts.
2. Step: Taking over the saved value by...
• terminating the parameterization mode and changing into the automatic mode,
• the visualization of the genset starts and by
• depressing the button "digit" for at least 5 seconds.

4.13.4 kWh-Counte r
The kWh-counter sums up the delivered electrical power of the generator, with the
greatest possible reading being 999,999 GWh. Afterwards, the kWh-counter must be
reset to 0 kWh. The kWh-counter cannot be precharged to a certain value, but can
only be reset. The reset is done by

• the visualization of the kWh-/MWh-counter and by


• depressing the button "digit" for at least 5 seconds.

4.13.5 Current Slav e Pointer


The device is equipped with a current slave pointer, taking up and storing the maxi-
mum generator current. The indication of the maximum generator current can be se-
lected with the button "annunciation" while in indication mode. The following mask
appears on the display:

000 000 000 000 Display of the maximum generator current


max.Gen.cur The maximum generator in the three phases is indicated and saved in this mask.

Reset The current slave pointer is reset by depressing the button "acknowledgement" for a
period of time of 2.5 s. The above mentioned mask must then be visible on the dis-
play.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 117/153
5 Commission

DANGER !!!

When commissioning the unit, please observe the five safety rules which apply to the handling of
live equipment. Make sure that you know how to provide first aid in current-related accidents and
that you know where the first-aid kit and the nearest telephone are. Never touch any live
components of the system or on the back of the system:

DANGER TO LIFE

WARNING !

The unit may only be commissioned by a qualified technician. The "EMERGENCY-OFF"-funciton


must be safely working prior to the commissiong, and must not depend on the device.

ATTENTION

1. Prior to the commissiong make sure that all measuring voltages are connected in
correct phase sequence. The connect commands for the power circuit breakers
must be disconnected at the power circuit breakers. The rotating field must be
measured. Any lack or incorrect connection of measuring voltages or other signals may
lead to incorrect functions and damage the unit as well as engines and components
connected to the unit.

Procedure 2. After making sure that all measuring phases are connected in correct phase relation, the
supply voltage (8..36 V DC) may be applied to the device.

3. By simultaneously depressing the two buttons 13 "digit↑" and 14 "position→" you go to the
input and test mode. After inputting the code number, all parameters are first set. (See the
Chapter regarding input masks).

4. After applying the supply voltage do check if all measuring values ( voltages, currents,
power, responses of the power circuit breakers as well as the analog inputs) are correctly
indicated. The unit must only be started if the power circuit breaker replies are correct.

5. First start the driving genset via the operating mode "MANUAL" (depressing the button
25 "MANUAL") ( 20 "START") and then stop it ( 21 "STOP"). All generator measuring values

must be checked. Please check all error trippings.

6. Do check the automatic starting procedure via the operating mode "TEST" (depressing
the button 23 "TEST"). Test alarms caused by faults with shutoff.

7. Operating mode "AUTO" (Depressing the button 22 "AUTO"): An automatic start, followed
by a synchronization, can now be effected by applying the automatic control inputs and the
motor request.
Control of the synchronisation: Check the rotating field of the generator and the generator
busbar. Check the add-on command with a zero voltmeter (determination of the phase an-
gle) at the generator power circuit breaker. If several trouble-free synchronizing pulses
were output, switch to operating mode STOP and reconnect the add-on pulse "Command:
Close GCB" with the unit at a standstill.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 118/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
8. If points 1 to 7 have been carried out successfully, an operation in parallel with the mains
can be started with a fixed value power (approx. 25 % of the generator rated power).
Whilst this is being carried out, the displayed measuring values must be checked. Check
GCB shutoff. Check the active load controller and, if necessary, the cos ϕ-controller. Pre-
specify various setpoint values and check control.

9. If the operation in parallel with the mains is satisfactory, the synchronisation of the mains
circuit breaker has to be checked:

At this point at the latest, it has to be made sure that the device has cleared or responded
to a power failure. During operation in parallel with the mains the unit must be switched to
MANUAL operating mode; the mains power circuit breaker is then deactivated. (LED re-
sponse MCB ON goes out). Then switch back to the operating mode AUTOMATIC.

Check the rotating field of the generator bus bar and the mains. Check the connect com-
mand with a zero voltmeter (determination of the phase angle) at the mains power circuit
breaker. If several trouble-free synchronizing pulse were output, go to the operating mode
STOP, and reconnect the add-on pulse "Command: MCB close" with the unit at a stand-
still.

10. Check the emergency power functions.

NOTE

The function in automatic mode is influenced via the available input signals "Automatic 1" and
"Automatic 2". Please note, that the responses of the power circuit breakers have to processed
inverted, i. e., with the power circuit breaker closed, 0 V must be applied to the inputs "CB open"
(auxiliary contact of the power circuit breaker used as abreak contact! - please also see the
description of the auxiliary and control inputs in the annex of this operating manual). It is vital that
these replies be connected!

Isolation between power supply and digital control and response inputs
By means of an appropriate external wiring, the common reference point of the digital in-
puts can be galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (0 V, terminal 2) . This may be for
instance necessary, if the digital inputs are no longer to be controlled with 24 V= and a
galvanic isolation between the control voltage (e. g. 220 V=, 220 VAC) and the supply
voltage must be ensured.

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 119/153
6 Annex

6.1 Analog Outp ut Manager (List of Parameters with Explanations) (Option A2)

NOTE

The parameters listed below can only be output correctly if the existing version of the unit permits
this.

Param. Output Input of the two limiting values


0 The analog output is inactive. Input irrelevant
1 Generator active power 0% lower performance (may be nega-
tive, too) e.g. -0050 kW
100% upper performance (may be nega-
[dimensionless] tive, too) e. g. 0200 kW
2 Generator actual-cos ϕ 0% lower distance to cos ϕ=1
[e. g. (-070.....+080) /100] e. g. -0030 corresponds to k0.70
(Definition at end of Table) 100% upper distance to cos ϕ=1
[dimensionless] e. g. 0030 corresponds to i0.70
3 Actual generator frequency 0% lower frequency e. g. 0000 corre-
sponds to 00.00 Hz.
100% upper Frequency z. B. 7000 corre-
[Hz∗100] sponds to 70.00 Hz.
4 Actual generator reactive power 0% capacitive reactive power (nega-
tive) e. g. -0100 kvar
100% inductive reactive power (positive)
kvar e. g. +0100 kvar
5 Rated power of all generators of a 0% lower performance (may be nega-
generator bus bar, minus nominal tive, too) e. g. -0050 kW
actual performance [kW] 100% upper performance (may be nega-
tive, too) e. g. 0200 kW
6 Total actual power of all generators 0% lower performance (may be nega-
connected to generator busbar tive, too) e. g. -0050 kW
kW 100% upper performance (may be nega-
tive, too) e. g. 0200 kW
7 Generator apparent current in L1 0% lower current output
e. g. 0000 A
100% upper current output
A e. g. 500 A
8 Generator apparent current in L2 0% lower current output
e.. g. 0000 A
100% upper current output
A e. g. 500 A
9 Generator apparent current in L3 0% lower current output
e. g. 0000 A
100% upper current output
A e. g. 500 A
10 Speed over pickup 0% lower speed
(terminals 91, 92, 93) e. g. 0000 min-1
100% upper speed
[min-1] e. g. 3000 min-1
11 Analog input 0% lower measuring value
temperature [°C] or [°F] or e.g. 0000 correspond to 000 °C
freely scaleable analog input at temperature input
100% upper measuring value
12 Analog input [T2] e.g. 0255 corresponds to 255 °C
temperature [°C] or [°F] at temperature input
freely scaleable analog input

13 Analog input [T3] 0% lower measuring value e. g. 0000


temperature [°C] or [°F] corresponds to 00.0 bar oil pres-
freely scaleable analog input sure
100% upper measuring value, e. g. 0100
corresponds to 10.0 bar oil pres-
sure
14 Analog input [T4]
temperature [°C] or [°F]
freely scaleable analog input

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 120/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Param. Output Input of the two limiting value
15 inactive
16 inactive
17 inactive
18 Additional freely scaleable analog
input (terminals 91, 92)

19 Actual mains active power 0% lower performance


e .g. -0800 kW
100% upper performance
kW e. g. 0800 kW
20 Mains apparent current in L1 0% lower current output
e. g. 0000 A
100% upper current output
A e. g. 500 A
21 Mains-cos ϕ 0% lower distance to cos ϕ=1
[e. g. (-070.....+080) /100] e. g. -0030 corresponds to k0.70
(Definition at end of Table) 100% upper distance to cos ϕ=1
[dimensionless] e. g. 0030 corresponds to i0.70
22 Actual mains reactive power 0% capacitive reactive power (nega-
tive) e. g. -0100 kvar
100% inductive reactive power (positive)
kvar e. g. +0100 kvar

The denomination 0 % either stands for 4 mA or 0 mA; the denomination 100 % stands for 20 mA. The values
may be entered as signed values (see parameter 1).

Definition of the cos ϕ-scaling In accordance with the scaling of the analog output, the cos ϕ can be output within
the range from k0.00 capacitive via cos ϕ = 1 to i0.00 inductive.

cosϕ = 1,00

kapazitiv induktiv
unterer Abstand oberer Abstand
z. B. 0030 z. B. 0030
skalierter Bereich (0..20 mA)
k 0,00 z. B. k0,70..1,00..i0,70 i 0,00

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 121/153
6.2 Relay Mana ger (List of Parameters with Explanations)
#
Parameter Output special version Explanation
1 Fault class 1
2 Fault class 2
3 Fault class 3
4 Firing speed reached / (motor runs)
5 Mains failure (fault)
6 Battery undervoltage
7 Operating mode AUTOMATIC
8 Operating mode MANUAL
9 Operating mode TEST
10 Operating mode STOP
11 Generator undervoltage
12 Generator overvoltage
13 Generator underfrequency
14 Generator overfrequency
15 Generator overcurrent level 1 UMZ
16 "Synchronization GCB" or "Connect GCB" time monitoring fault.
17 Unit false start
18 Generator load imbalance
19 Generator overload
20 Generator reverse power/reduced load
21 Readiness for operation message Output via relay manager
22 Analog input [T1], level 1
23 Analog input [T1], level 2
24 Analog input [T2], level 1
25 Analog input [T2], level 2
26 Analog input [T3], level 1
27 Analog input [T3], level 2
28 Analog input [T4], level 1
29 Analog input [T4], level 2
30 Internal
31 Internal
32 Internal
33 Internal
34 Internal
35 Internal
36 Internal
37 Internal
38 Digital input [E]
39 Digital input 1
40 Digital input 2
41 Digital input 3
42 Digital input 4
43 Digital input 5
44 Digital input 6
45 Digital input 7
46 Digital input 8
47 Digital input 9
48 Digital input [A]
49 Digital input [B]
50 Digital input [C]
51 Digital input [D]
52 Auxiliaries e. g. pump pretravel/-coasting
53# Cooling water preheating ON
54 Group alarm fault class 1, fault class 2 or fault class 3 no brief acknowledg. possible
55 Operating mode TEST or AUTOMATIC selected
56 Generator power watchdog, level 1
57 MCB is closed
58 GCB is closed
59# Interface fault Y1Y5

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 122/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
#
Parameter Output special version Explanation
60 Operation in parallel with the mains is desired: Clear blocking of GCB ↔ MCB Relay is set if the MCB or the
GCB are synchronized and if
MCB + GCB are closed (NPB)
61 Overcurrent I/t or generator overcurrent level 2 UMZ
62 Introduce load-shedding: Add-on / Sync. GCB carried out or circuit breaker is closed Signal is set prior to connec-
tion / synchronization and
remains present when circuit
breaker is closed.
63 Add-on / Sync. MCB carried out or circuit breaker is closed Signal is set prior to connec-
tion / synchronization and
remains present when circuit
breaker is closed.
64 Overspeed pickup
65 Emergency power is active
66 Shutoff malfunction
67 Power watchdog for power supplied by the mains
68 Maintenance call
69 Pickup/gen. differential frequency The electrically determined
speed and the speed deter-
mined via pickup are different
70 Time monitoring fault "synchronization MCB" or "add-on MCB".
71 GCB synchronization carried out
72 MCB synchronization carried out
73 Lamp test active
74 Malfunction "Reply: GCB is open" - fault on closing The GCB cannot be closed
after 5 attempts.
75 Malfunction "Reply: MCB is open" - fault on closing The MCB cannot be closed
after 5 attempts.
76 Malfunction "Reply: GCB is open" - fault on opening 2 s following the "Command:
GCB open" a reply continues
to be detected.
77 Malfunction "Reply: MCB is open" - fault on opening 2 s following the "Command:
MCB open" a reply continues
to be detected.
78 Power supplied by the mains <> 0 In the event of interchange
synchronization, the incoming
power zero cannot be ad-
justed. As a result of this, the
MCB is prevented from open-
ing. Reset via acknowledg-
ment.
79 Isolated operation in parallel with other gensets /operatin in parallel with the mains
80 Synchronization on MCB and NPB Relay is set if,
1.) MCB synchronized
2.) if MCB + GCB are closed
(NPB)
3.) if GCB synchronized on
closed MCB
→ no synchronization on IPB
→ for voltage controllers which
are only operated in parallel
with the mains.

81# Button "ACKN" depressed


82 Preheating
83 Centralized alarm see centralized alarm

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 123/153
6.3 Interface (O ptions Su/Sb/Sf)
6.3.1 Transmitting Telegram (Option Su/Sb)
Number Content (words) Unit/Bit Comment
3964 MOD bus

00 01 0 (00, 01) Telegram call sign 900 Telegram type


02 03 1 (02, 03) Generator voltage L12 V
04 05 2 (04, 05) Generator voltage L23 V
06 07 3 (06, 07) Generator voltage L31 V
08 09 4 (08, 09) Generator frequency 1/ 10 Hz
10 11 5 (10, 11) Generator current L1 A
12 13 6 (12, 13) Generator current L2 A
14 15 7 (14, 15) Generator current L3 A
16 17 8 (16, 17) Generator power factor dim.los 1.00 0064H
i0.99 (induktiv) 0063H
k0.98 (kapazitiv) FF9EH
18 19 9 (18, 19) Generator active power kW
20 21 10 (20, 21) Generator reactive power kvar
22 23 11 (22, 23) Busbar voltage L12 V
24 25 12 (24, 25) Busbar frequency 1/ 10 Hz
26 27 13 (26, 27) Mains voltage L12 V
28 29 14 (28, 29) Mains voltage L23 V
30 31 15 (30, 31) Mains voltage L31 V
32 33 16 (32, 33) Mains frequency 1/ 10 Hz
34 35 17 (34, 35) Mains current L1 A
36 37 18 (36, 37) Mains power factor dim.los 1.00 0064H
i0.99 (induktiv) 0063H
k0.98 (kapazitiv) FF9EH
38 39 19 (38, 39) Mains interchange power kW
40 41 20 (40, 41) Status of the power circuit breakers Bit 15 =1 \
Internal
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Internal
0000H = all power circuit breakers Bit 12 =1 /
are open Bit 11 =0 \
Internal
Bit 10 =0 /
# always closed when asynchronous Bit 9 =1 \ Mains circuit breaker
Bit 8 =1 / closed #
Bit 7 =1 \
Internal
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Internal
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =0 \
Internal
Bit 2 =0 /
Bit 1 =1 \ Generator power circuit breaker
Bit 0 =1 / closed
42 43 21 (42, 43) Operating hours h
44 45 22 (44, 45) Maintenance call h
46 47 23 (46, 47) Battery voltage 1/10 V

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 124/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Number Content (words) Unit Comment
3964 MOD bus

48 49 24 (48, 49) Fault message 1 Bit 15 =1 \


Internal
internal error Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Internal
0000H = no troubles are present Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Internal
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Internal
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \ Analog input 4, WARNING
Bit 6 =1 / (terminals 102/103/104)
The following applies: Bit 5 =1 \ Analog input 2, WARNING
Bit 0/bit 1 Bit 4 =1 / (terminals 99/100/101)
0/0 = no GW reached Bit 3 =1 \ Analog input 2, WARNING
0/1 = GW 1 reached Bit 2 =1 / (terminals 96/97/98)
1/0 = GW 2 reached Bit 1 =1 \ Analog input 1, WARNING
1/1 = GW 1+GW 2 reached Bit 0 =1 / (terminals 93/94/95)
50 51 25 (50, 51) Fault message 2 Bit 15 =1 \
Mains vector jump
internal errors Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \ Plausibility control
0000H = no Bit 12 =1 / Pickup/Generator
malfunctions are present Bit 11 =1 \ Generator overspeed /
Bit 10 =1 / Pickup/overspeed
Bit 9 =1 \
Overcurrent level 2
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Start failure
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Load imbalance
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
GCB synchronization time fault
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Overcurrent level 1
Bit 0 =1 /
52 53 26 (52, 53) Fault message 3 Bit 15 =1 \
Maintenance call
internal error Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Battery undervoltage
0000H = no Bit 12 =1 /
malfunctions are present Bit 11 =1 \
Generator overload
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Reverse power
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \ Generator frequency
Bit 6 =1 / exceeded-/fallen below
Bit 5 =1 \ Generator voltage
Bit 4 =1 / exceeded-/fallen below
Bit 3 =1 \ Mains frequency
Bit 2 =1 / exceeded-/fallen below
Bit 1 =1 \ Mains voltage
Bit 0 =1 / exceeded-/fallen below

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 125/153
Number Content (words) Unit Comment
3964 MOD bus

54 55 27 (54, 55) Fault message 4 Bit 15 =1 \


Terminal 68
digital inputs Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Terminal 67
0000H = no Bit 12 =1 /
malfunctions are present Bit 11 =1 \
Terminal 66
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Terminal 65
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Terminal 64
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Terminal 63
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Terminal 62
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Terminal 61
Bit 0 =1 /
56 57 28 (56, 57) Fault message 5 Bit 15 =1 \
Internal
digital inputs Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Internal
0000H = no Bit 12 =1 /
malfunctions are present Bit 11 =1 \
Terminal 74
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Terminal 73
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Terminal 72
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Terminal 71
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Terminal 70
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Terminal 69
Bit 0 =1 /
58 59 29 (58, 59) Malfunction message 6 Bit 15 =1 Internal
Internal fault Bit 14 =1 Internal
Bit 13 =1 Internal
0000H = no Bit 12 =1 Internal
malfunctions are present Bit 11 =1 Range fault analog input 4
Bit 10 =1 Range fault analog input 3
Bit 9 =1 Range fault analog input 2
Bit 8 =1 Range fault analog input 1
Bit 7 =1 \
MCB synchronization time fault
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Shutoff malfunction
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Sprinkler operation
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Serial interface Y1..Y5
Bit 0 =1 /

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 126/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Number Content (words) Unit Comment
3964 MOD bus

60 61 30 (60, 61) Malfunction message 7 Bit 15 =1 \


Internal
Internal fault Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Internal
0000H = no Bit 12 =1 /
malfunctions are present Bit 11 =1 \
Internal
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Internal
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Internal
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Internal
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Internal
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Internal
Bit 0 =1 /
62 63 31 (62, 63) Operating mode Bit 15 =1 \
Terminal 6 set
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Internal
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Operating mode TEST
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Operating mode MANUAL
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Automatic 2
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Automatic 1
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Operating mode AUTOMATIC
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Operating mode STOP
Bit 0 =1 /
64 65 32 (64, 65) Fault class Bit 15 =1 \
Internal
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Internal
0000H = no fault Bit 12 =1 /
before Bit 11 =1 \
Internal
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Internal
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Internal
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Fault class 3
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Fault class 2
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Fault class 1
Bit 0 =1 /
66 67 33 (66, 67) Generator active energy kWh High Word
68 69 34 (68, 69) Low Word
70 71 35 (70, 71) Reserve Internal
72 73 36 (72, 73) Internal
74 75 37 (74, 75) Analog input 1 (terminals 93/94/95) alternatively according to setting
76 77 38 (76, 77) Analog input 2 (terminals 96/97/98) alternatively according to setting
78 79 39 (78, 79) Analog input 3 (terminals 99/100/101) alternatively according to setting
80 81 40 (80, 81) Analog input 4 (terminals 102/103/104) alternatively according to setting
82 83 41 (82, 83) Reserve
84 85 42 (84, 85) Reserve
86 87 43 (86, 87) Reserve
88 89 44 (88, 89) Reserve

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 127/153
6.3.2 Receiving T elegram (Option Sb)
a.) Receiving Telegram via RS232 / DK 3964

Number Content (words) Unit Comment


3964

00 01 Remote start 00F0H remote start


000FH no remote start
02 03 Remote stop 00F0H remote stop
000FH no remote stop
04 05 Active power setpoint with control argument kWh Bit 15/Bit 14 Control argument
0/1 F-power
0/0 L-power
1/x B-power
(also see 0, page 136)
06 07 Reserve
08 09 Acknowledgment 00F0H Acknowledgement
000FH no acknowledgement
10 11 Reserve
12 13 Reserve
14 15 Reserve
16 17 Reserve
18 19 Reserve

b.) Receiving Telegram via RS485 / MOD-Bus RTU Slave

Number Content (words) Unit Comment


MOD bus

0 (00, 01) Active power setpoint with control argument kWh Bit 15/Bit 14 Control argument
0/1 F-power
0/0 L-power
1/x B-power
(also see 0, page 136)
1 (02, 03) Reserve
2 (04, 05) Control word Bit 15 =1 Internal
Bit 14 =1 Internal
Bit 13 =1 Internal
Bit 12 =1 Internal
Bit 11 =1 Internal
Bit 10 =1 Internal
Bit 9 =1 Internal
Bit 8 =1 Internal
Bit 7 =1\ Internal
Bit 6 =1/ Internal
Bit 5 =1\ Internal
bits 4 1 = Acknowledgement
0 = no acknowledgement
Bit 3 =1\ Always "0"
Bit 2 =1 Always "0"
Bit 1 =1 1 = remote stop
0 = no remote stop
Bit 0 =1/ 1 = remote start
0 = no remote start

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 128/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
6.3.3 Remote Mon itoring and Control via Gateway GW 4 (Option Sf)
a.) Remote Monitoring via Gateway GW 4 (Transmission Telegram)

No. Content (words) Unit Comment

0 CAN-Bus (CAL)-Bus (Watchdog) Bit 15 = = 1 CAN Bus o.k.


Bit 0-2 = generator number - 1
1 Generator voltage U12 V × 10UGNEXPO
2 Generator frequency f Hz × 100
3 Generator active power P W × 10PGNEXPO
4 H.B. Exponent generator power PGNEXPO
L.B. Exponent generator voltage UGNEXPO
5 Current generator active power setpoint (steps) For display in kW: (Value/2800) × PGNWD
6 Conversion factor steps Æ kW PGNWD
7 Phase-to-phase bus bar voltage U12 V × 10UGNEXPO
8 Phase-to-phase mains voltage U12 V × 10UNTEXPO
9 Currently present fault class Bit 15 =1 Internal
Bit 14 =1 Internal
Bit 13 =1 \
Fault class 2 or 3
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
"Fault" LED flashes
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 Internal
Bit 8 =1 Internal
Bit 7 =1 \
Fault class 3
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Fault class 2
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Fault class 1
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Internal
Bit 0 =1 /
10 Control register 2 Bit 15 =1 \
Pset internal1 selected
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Pset internal2 selected
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 Internal
Bit 10 =1 Internal
Bit 9 =1 \
Release MCB
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Response GCB
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Response MCB
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Terminal 6 has been set (High signal)
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Shutoff power reached
Bit 0 =1 /
11 Actual mains active power W × 10PNTEXPO

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 129/153
No. Content (words) Unit Comment

12 Control register 1 Bit 15 =1 \


Internal
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 Internal
Bit 12 =1 Internal
Bit 11 =1 \ Execution of acknowledgment of a
Bit 10 =1 / F2/F3 fault
Bit 9 =1 \ Execution of acknowledgment of a
Bit 8 =1 / F1-fault
Bit 7 =1 \
Internal
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Internal
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Internal
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 Internal
Bit 0 =1 Internal
13 Reserve Internal
14 Internal fault 6 Bit 15 =1 \
Pickup plausibility fault
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Unit activation malfunction
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 MCB switch malfunction
Bit 10 =1 GCB switch malfunction
Bit 9 =1 MCB synchronization time monitoring
Bit 8 =1 GCB synchronization time monitoring
Bit 7 =1 Internal
Bit 6 =1 Internal
Bit 5 =1 Internal
Bit 4 =1 Internal
Bit 3 =1 Range fault analog input 4
Bit 2 =1 Range fault analog input 3
Bit 1 =1 Range fault analog input 2
Bit 0 =1 Range fault analog input 1
15 Phase-to-phase generator voltage U23 V × 10UGNEXPO
16 Phase-to-phase generator voltage U31 V × 10UGNEXPO
17 Generator star voltage U1N V × 10UGNEXPO
18 Generator star voltage U2N V × 10UGNEXPO
19 Genertor voltage Star U3N V × 10UGNEXPO

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 130/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
No. Content (words) Unit Comment

20 Generator frequency determined from pickup Hz × 256


21 Unit speed from pickup min-1
22 Generator current in L1 A × 10IGNEXPO
23 Generator current in L2 A × 10IGNEXPO
24 Generator current in L3 A × 10IGNEXPO
25 Actual generator reactive power var × 10PNTEXPO positive = inductive
26 Generator cos ϕ Example: 0064H cos ϕ = 1.00
0063H cos ϕ = i 0.99 (inductive)
FF9EH cos ϕ = k0.98 (capacitive)
27 Current reserve power in the system kW
28 Current actual active power in the system kW
29 Number of subscribers in the CAN bus
30 H.B. Status Mains FFH voltage and frequency applied
L.B. Status Generator 00H voltage and frequency not applied
31 H.B. Exponent generator current
IGNEXPO
L.B. Reserve
32 Busbar frequency Hz × 100
33 H.B. Status busbar FFH voltage and frequency applied
L.B. Reserve 00H voltage and frequency not applied
34 Phase-to-phase mains voltage U23 V × 10UNTEXPO
35 Phase-to-phase mains voltage U31 V × 10UNTEXPO
36 Mains voltage Star U1N V × 10UNTEXPO
37 Mains voltage Star U2N V × 10UNTEXPO
38 Mains voltage Star U3N V × 10UNTEXPO
39 Mains frequency from UN12/UN23/UN31 Hz × 100
40 Mains current in L1 A × 10INTEXPO
41 Mains reactive power var × 10PNTEXPO
42 Mains cos ϕ Example: 0064H cos ϕ = 1.00
0063H cos ϕ = i 0.99 (inductive)
FF9EH cos ϕ = k0.98 (capacitive)
43 H.B. Exponent mains power PNTEXPO
L.B. Exponent mains voltage UNTEXPO
44 H.B. Exponent mains current
INTEXPO
L.B. Reserve
45 Genset running hours ( H.W.) h Double word
46 Genset running hours ( L.W.)
47 Hours until next maintenance h
48 Unit start number
49 Operating mode ( H.B.) Bit 15 =1 Internal
Bit 14 =1 Operating mode STOP
Bit 13 =1 Operating mode TEST
Bit 12 =1 Operating mode MANUAL
Bit 11 =1 Operating mode AUTOMATIC
Bit 10 =1 Internal
Bit 9 =1 Internal
Bit 8 =1 Internal
Operating mode ( L.B.) Bit 7 =1 \
Emergency power is ON
Bit 6 =0 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Delayed motor monitoring is ON
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Coasting END
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Internal
Bit 0 =1 /

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 131/153
No. Content (words) Unit Comment

50 Generator active energy ( H.W.) kWh Double word


51 Generator active energy (L.W.)
52 Battery voltage V × 10
53 Internal fault 1 Bit 15 =1 \
Generator overfrequency
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Generator underfrequency
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Generator overvoltage
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Generator undervoltage
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Internal
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Battery undervoltage
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Generator overload
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Generator reverse power
Bit 0 =1 /
54 Internal fault 2 Bit 15 =1 \
Mains overfrequency
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Mains underfrequency
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Mains overvoltage
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Mains undervoltage
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Interface fault X1..X5
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Internal
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Internal
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Mains vector shift
Bit 0 =1 /
55 Internal fault 3 Bit 15 =1 \
Overcurrent level 2
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Generator overspeed (pickup)
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Incoming power 0 not reached
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Load imbalance
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Generator overcurrent level 1
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Interface fault Y1..Y5
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Maintenance call
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Start failure
Bit 0 =1 /

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 132/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
No. Content (words) Unit Comment

56 Internal fault 4 Bit 15 =1 \


Analog input 1 - level 1
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Analog input 1 - level 2
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Analog input 2 - level 1
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Analog input 2 - level 2
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Analog input 3 - level 1
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Analog input 3 - level 2
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Analog input 4 - level 1
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Analog input 4 - level 2
Bit 0 =1 /
57 Internal fault 5 Bit 15 =1 \
Internal
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Internal
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Internal
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Internal
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Internal
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Internal
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Internal
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Internal
Bit 0 =1 /
58 External faults terminals 61-68 Bit 15 =1 \
Terminal 61
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Terminal 62
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Terminal 63
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Terminal 64
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Terminal 65
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Terminal 66
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Terminal 67
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Terminal 68
Bit 0 =1 /

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 133/153
No. Content (words) Unit Comment

59 External fault Bit 15 =1 \


Terminal 69
Bit 14 =1 /
Bit 13 =1 \
Terminal 70
Bit 12 =1 /
Bit 11 =1 \
Terminal 71
Bit 10 =1 /
Bit 9 =1 \
Terminal 72
Bit 8 =1 /
Bit 7 =1 \
Terminal 73
Bit 6 =1 /
Bit 5 =1 \
Terminal 74
Bit 4 =1 /
Bit 3 =1 \
Internal
Bit 2 =1 /
Bit 1 =1 \
Internal
Bit 0 =1 /
60 Internal fault 7 Bit 15 =1 Internal
Bit 14 =1 Internal
Bit 13 =1 Internal
Bit 12 =1 Internal
Bit 11 =1 Internal
Bit 10 =1 Internal
Bit 9 =1 Internal
Bit 8 =1 Internal
Bit 7 =1 Internal
Bit 6 =1 Internal
Bit 5 =1 Internal
Bit 4 =1 Internal
Bit 3 =1 Internal
Bit 2 =1 Internal
Bit 1 =1 Internal
Bit 0 =1 Internal
61 Analog input 1 (terminals 93..95) The measured value is transmitted.
62 Analog input 2 (terminals 96..98) The measured value is transmitted.
63 Analog input 3 (terminals 99..101) The measured value is transmitted.
64 Analog input 4 (terminals 102..105) The measured value is transmitted.
65 Reserve Internal
66 Reserve Internal
67 Reserve Internal
68 Reserve Internal
69 The currently active display A number is transmitted; please consult the following
table for the meaning of this number.

The next genset is addressed with the number 70


Word 0 CAN-Bus (CAL)-Bus (Watchdog)
Word 1 generator voltage U12
Word 2 etc.

UGNEXPO Exponent generator voltage


IGNEXPO Exponent generator current
PGNEXPO Exponent generator power
UNTEXPO Exponent mains voltage
PNTEXPO Exponent mains power
PGNWD Conversion factor steps Æ kW

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 134/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Designation of the number 69 of the telegram "display indication currently active":

Number Designation Hex-number


0 GCB synchronization 00FF
1 MCB synchronization 01FF
2 GCB black start 02FF
3 MCB black start 03FF
4 Start 04FF
5 Start pause 05FF
6 Coasting 06FF
7 Motor stop! 07FF
8 Preheating 08FF
9 Purging operation 09FF
10 Initial state 0AFF
11 Auxiliary coasting 0BFF
12 Auxiliary advance 0CFF
13 Mains settling 0DFF
14 Lambda initial state 0EFF
15 Sprinkler coasting 0FFF
16 free
17 free
18 free
19 free
20 free
21 free
22 free
23 free
24 free
25 free
26 free
27 Sprinkler operation and simultaneous emergency 1BFF
power
28 Sprinkler operation 1CFF
29 Emergency power 1DFF
30 TEST 1EFF
31 Load test 1FFF
...
255 No display on the display (basic screen) FFFF

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 135/153
b.) Remote control via gateway GW 4 (receiving telegram)

The remote control data are only accepted by the AMG 2, if the device is equipped
with the corresponding option.

No. Content (words) Unit Comment

1 Active power setpoint with control argument kW see below


2 Reserve
3 Control word Bit 15 Internal
Bit 14 Internal
Bit 13 Internal
Bit 12 Internal
Bit 11 Internal
Bit 10 Internal
Bit 91 Internal
Bit 8 Internal
Bit 7 Internal
Bit 6 Internal
Bit 5 Internal
Bit 4 =1 Acknowledgement
Bit 3 =0 always 0
Bit 2 =0 always 0
Bit 1 =1 Remote stop (high priority)
Bit 0 =1 Remote start

The next genset is addressed with the number 4


Word 1 Active energy setpoint value
Word 2 etc.

6.3.4 Comments ( on Interface)


a.) Frame Data for the Procedure 3964 (TTY, RS232, RS485)

Data Length of characters 8 Bit


Stopbit ........................... 1 Bit
Paritybit.......................... 1 Bit with even parity
Release condition .......... Corresponds to the log status. ″1″ (20 mA at TTY)
Data format.................... 16 Bit binary values
Transmitting rate............ 9600 baud. Other baud rates on request. The records are
transferred cyclically.

Procedure Interpreter RK 512 See Siemens documents for procedure 3964.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 136/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
b.) Frame Data for the Hardware Handshaking RTS/CTS (RS232)

Data Length of characters 8 Bit


Stop bit .......................... 1 Bit
Parity bit......................... 1 Bit with even parity
Data format.................... 16 Bit binary values
Transmitting rate............ 9600 baud. Other baud rates on request. The records are
transferred cyclically.

Procedure If the transmitter is ready for the data transmission, it informs the receiver by setting
its control wire RTS into the "ON"-status. The prerequisite of this is that no data are
received (CTS = "OFF"). The receiver registers this status and indicates its readiness
for reception by switching its RTS line to "ON". The transmitter can then begin trans-
mitting when it detects this "ON" status on its CTS line. As soon as the receiver with-
draws its RTS signal (RTS = "OFF"), the transmitter interrupts its transmission and
waits until the receiver is ready to receive again. The initialization conflict (both sub-
scribers set the RTS line simultaneously) and time-out (one subscriber waits un-
sucessfully for a reply) must be taken into consideration.

c.) Encoding of the Current Direction

The current direction can be recognized via the code word prefix. A positive trans-
mitted value means outgoing supply (power output), a negative transmitted value
means power consumption (incoming supply).

d.) Encoding of the Power Default

The following power values may be prespecified: Fixed value power (F-power),
Lieferleistung (L-power) and incoming power (B-power) (see operating manual). The
active power setpoint is transmitted in binary form using bits 0..13. The control argu-
ment must be transmitted in the basis of bits 14 and 15. In this case, the following
coding applies:

Control argument Bit 15 = Bit 14


F power 0 1
L power 0 0
B power 1 1

Examples:
F power of 150 kW is to be compensated. The value transmitted is then:
01/00 0000 1001 0110 B Î 4096 H

L power of 300 kW is to be compensated. The value transmitted is then:


00/00 0001 0010 1100 B Î 012C H

B power of 600 kW is to be compensated. Negative power is transmitted. The value


transmitted is then:
11/11 1101 1010 1000 B Î FDA8 H

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 137/153
e.) Exponents and Conversion Factors in the Interface Protocol via Gateway GW 4

UGNEXPO Exponent generator voltage


IGNEXPO Exponent generator current
PGNEXPO Exponent generator power
UNTEXPO Exponent mains voltage
PNTEXPO Exponent mains power
PGNWD Conversion factor steps Æ kW

6.4 Measured Q uantities and Technical Data


6.4.1 Measured Q uantities
Measuring quantity Display and range Comment
Frequency
Generator, busbar fL1Gen/SS, fL2Gen/SS, fL3Gen 15.0..85.0 Hz
Mains fL1Mains, fL2Mains, fL3Mains 40.0..85.0 Hz
Voltage
UL1, UL2, UL3, UL12, UL23, UL31 0.. 520 V Adjustable transformer ratio
Current
Generator, mains IL1Gen/Mains, IL2Gen, IL3Gen 0..9,999. A999 -
Max value IL1, IL2, IL3 0..9,999. A999 Slave pointer
Active power
Total actual active power value -32.0..32.0 MW -
Reactive power
Actual value in L1, L2, L3 -32.0..32.0 Mvar -
Apparent power
Overall actual apparent power 0..45.0 MVA -
cos ϕ
Actual value cos ϕL1Gen/mains i0.00..1.00..c0.00 -
Miscellaneous
Active energy 0..4,200 GWh Not calibrated by PTB
Operating hours 0..65,000 h -
Maintenance call 0..99,999 h -
Start counter 0..49,999 -
Battery voltage 10..30 V -
Pickup speed fN ± 40 % -
Analog inputs
Pt100 0..250 °C Not calibrated by PTB
Pt1000 0..250 °C Not calibrated by PTB
0..180 Ω Freely scaleable For VDO pulsar
0..360 Ω Freely scaleable For VDO pulsar
PTC Freely scaleable -
0 /4.. 20 mA Freely scaleable -
0 ..10 V Freely scaleable -
0.. 150 mV Freely scaleable -

a.) Reference Conditions for the Recorded Quantities


*
The data apply to the following reference conditions:

- Input voltage = sinusoidal rated voltage


- Input current = sinusoidal rated current
- Frequency = rated frequency ± 2 %
- Supply voltage = rated voltage ± 2 %
- Power factor ϕ = 1
- Ambient temperature 23 °C ± 2 K
- Warm-up period = 20 minutes.

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 138/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
6.4.2 Technical D ata
Measuring quantities - measuring voltages...........................................[1] 100..115 VAC, [4] 380..440 VAC
- measuring currents ............................................................................ ../1 A, ../5 A
- measuring frequency ........................................................................40.0..70.0 Hz
- accuracy .....................................................................................................class 1

Ambient quantities - voltage supply.................................9.5..32 VDC, intrinsic consumption max. 15 W


- ambient temperature..............................................................................-20..70 °C
- ambient humidity...................................................................... 95 %, not condens

Measuring inputs • Voltage .....................................................................................resistances 0.1 %


- permanent input voltage ...........................................................................2.0 × UN
- linear measuring range up to ....................................................................1.3 × UN
- Iinput resistance................................................................[1] 0.21 MΩ, [4] 0.7 MΩ
- maximum power consumption per path......................................................0.15 W

• Current ...............................................................................metallically separated


- maximum continuous current.................................. IGen = 3.0 × IN, Imains = 1.5 × IN
- power consumption................................................................................ < 0.15 VA
- rated short-time current (1 s) .............................[..1/ A] 50.0 × IN, [../5 A] 10.0 × IN

Digital inputs - metallically separated


- input range.............................................................................................. 4..40 VDC
- input resistance......................................................................................ca. 6.8 kΩ

Potential-free outputs - metallically separated


- contact material ......................................................................................... AgCdO
- electric life cycle (ohmic load)................................................................................
min. 100,000 switching cycles at 2 A / 250 VAC
- current load............................................................. max 2 A at 250 VAC or 24 VDC
- maximum switching voltage...................................................... 250 VAC or 24 VDC
- maximum switching capacity DC ...................................................................45 W

Analog inputs - freely scaleable............................................................................ resolution 10 Bit


- Pt100-/Pt1000-input................................. for measuring resistors acc. to IEC 751
[Pt100] 2/3-wire-mesurement, 0..200 °C,
[Pt1000] 2-wire-measurement, -30..200 °C
- 0/4..20 mA-input ......................................... differential measurement, load 150 Ω
- 0..5/10 V-input .......... differential measurement, input resistance approx. 16.5 kΩ
- 0..180/380 Ω-input .................. differential measurement, sensor current ≤1.9 mA
- NiCrNi-input ......................for thermocouples type K acc. to IEC 584, -90..900 °C

Analog outputs - for actual value output ................................................................. freely scaleable,


metallically separated, insulation voltage 3,000 VDC
0..5 V, ±5 V, 0..10 V, 0..20 mA
- resolution PWM ..................................................... 8/12 Bit (depending on model)
- 0/4..20 mA-output ................................................................ maximum load 500 Ω
- 0..10 V/±5 V-output........................................................ internal resistance ”1 kΩ

Interface - galvanically separated ...............................................insulation voltage 3,000 VDC


- version ...................................................................................................... variable

Housing - Typ................................................................................. APRANORM DIN 43 700


- dimensions (B×H×T)............................................................... 144 × 96 × 118 mm
- front cutout (B×H) ............................................................................. 138 × 88 mm
- connection ......................... screw-type connectors, depending on plug connector
1.5 mm² or 2.5 mm²
- weight .........................................................depending on model, approx. 1,000 g

Protection - disturbance test (CE) ...................... tested according to applicable EN guidelines


- protection system...........................................................................................IP 21
- front foil ...................................................................................... insulating surface

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 139/153
6.5 Dimensions
Housing Typ APRANORM DIN 43 700
Dimensions 144 × 96 × 118 mm
Front cutout 138 × 88 mm
Connection Screw type connector, depending on plug connector 1.5 mm² or
2.5 mm²
Protection system IP 21
Weight depending on model, approx. 1,000 g

S id e view F ro n t view

P C -p a ra m e te riz in g P C -p a ra m e te riz in g
c o n n e cto r c o n n e cto r
96

88

B o tto m view

1 16
8

B a ck vie w w ith
co n n e ctin g te rm in als

48 25

90 92 Y1 Y5 X1 X5 120 128

93 104 60 75
139
144

50 54

0 1 24

1 9 9 9 -0 2 -1 0 G 3 X X 1 0 6 9 .S K D

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 140/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
6.6 Wiring Diagr am
6.6.1 Version NEB

7 33 34 35 36 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 18 19 43 44 45 46 37 38 47 48 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104


T4
sid e o f the unit.T his is w he re the accom pan yin g D IR E K T-
T h e socke t for th e P C pa ra m ete rization is situ ated on the

P AR A K A B E L ha s to b e plug ged in .
q u a s i-c o n tin u o u s co n tro lle r w ith a n a lo g o u tp u ts A na log in put 4 [T4]

P T C (0 ..1 6 kO hm ), 0..180 O h m , 0..3 80 O h m


A n a lo g in puts 1 to 7 a lternative ly a s :
P t1 0 0 , P t1 000 (2- o r 3-w ire s ys tem ),

(W irin g: see O perating M a nual)


0 /4 ..2 0 m A , 0..1 0 V , 0 ..160 m V
9 10 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 120 121 122 123

A2
11 12 13
GND GND GND A na log in put 3 [T3]

A nalog output
m anager
UA GND IA
A na log ou tput
C o n tro l ro o m

0/4 ..20 m A
IA GND
SPS
PC

IA A na log in put 2 [T2]


9 10

GND GND

Sc
C A N -L
UA GND
C A N -H
IA
8

C A N bu s inte rface
GND A na log in put 1 [T1]
E ng ine le vel
G A TE W A Y

(m o d e m )
GW 4

T erm ination

B a sic u nit
GND

Sf
C A N -L P icku p

C A N -H sw itching/inductive
C A N bu s inte rface
GND
G u ida nce leve l S ta nd a rd =
R ela y 4 C e ntralize d a la rm

T erm ination
S ta nd a rd =
R ela y 3 Ig nition / p re g low
B a sic u./Q f

low er SPEED
D rive

(three -positio n con troller)


higher
alterna tive: S tarter
A na log con troller ou tput
39 40 16 17 53 54 23 24 41 42 14 15 4 25 26 29 30 31 32 20 21 22 11 12 13 8

B a sic u nit B a sic u./Q u

low er V O L TAG E
(three -positio n con troller) S tart relay / G as valve
G

higher
alterna tive:
A na log con troller ou tput
R ead in ess for o peration
G e ne ra tor voltage L3
3

G e ne ra tor voltage L2 Inp ut 14 E

G e ne ra tor voltage L1 Inp ut 13 D

s1 (k) Inp ut 12 C
G e ne ra tor current L3
s2 (l) Inp ut 11 B

s1 (k) Inp ut 10 A
G e ne ra tor current L2
s2 (l) Inp ut 9 9

s1 (k) Inp ut 8 8
G e ne ra tor current L1
s2 (l) Inp ut 7 7

R eply: G C B is open Inp ut 6 6

Inp ut 5 5
C o m m an d: close G C B
GCB

Inp ut 4 4

Inp ut 3 3
C om m a nd: ope n G C B
Inp ut 2 or
2
D yn am o inp ut
Inp ut 1
L2 1
(fault class 3 : em e rge ncy S T O P )
B usb ar voltage
L1 C o m m on
3

R eply: M C B is open
(freely program -
R elay m anager

m able relays)

R ela y 2
R ele ase M C B
MCB

C o m m an d: close M C B R ela y 1

C om m o n (term inal 3/4 /5/6/53/54)


A M G 3/N E B

C o m m an d: o pen M C B
M u lti fu nctio n te rm inal
3

A uto m atic 2
5

A uto m atic 1
3
50 51 52

M a ins vo ltag e L3 0 V DC
2

M a ins vo ltag e L2 12 /24 V D C


1

M a ins vo ltag e L1 N
0

P rin te d 0 1 /20 01 ; s ub je c t to te c hn ica l m o cific atio ns . 2 0 0 1 -0 1 -3 0 / AM G 3 An sc h lu ß pla n g 3le o-05 01 -a p.sk f

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 141/153
6.6.2 Version N1P B

7 33 34 35 36 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 18 19 43 44 45 46 37 38 47 48 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104


X /T 4 /T z
sid e o f the unit.T his is w he re the accom pan yin g D IR E K T-
T h e socke t for th e P C pa ra m ete rization is situ ated on the

P AR A K A B E L ha s to b e plug ged in .
q u a s i-c o n tin u o u s co n tro lle r w ith a n a lo g o u tp u ts
A na log in put 4 [T4]

P T C (0 ..1 6 kO hm ), 0..180 O h m , 0..3 80 O h m


A n a lo g in puts 1 to 7 a lternative ly a s :
P t1 0 0 , P t1 000 (2- o r 3-w ire s ys tem ),

(W irin g: see O perating M a nual)


0 /4 ..2 0 m A , 0..1 0 V , 0 ..160 m V
9 10 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 120 121 122 123

A2
11 12 13
GND GND GND A na log in put 3 [T3]

A nalog output
m anager
UA GND IA
A na log ou tput
C o n tro l ro o m

0/4 ..20 m A
IA GND
SPS
PC

A na log in put 2 [T2]


IA
(op tion Tz: P t100)
9 10

GND GND

Sc
C A N -L
UA GND
C A N -H
IA
8

C A N bu s inte rface A na log in put 1 [T1]


GND
E ng ine le vel (op tion X : 0/4 ..20 m A )
G A TE W A Y

(m o d e m )
GW 4

T erm ination

B a sic u nit
GND

Sf
C A N -L P icku p

C A N -H sw itching/inductive
C A N bu s inte rface
GND
G u ida nce leve l S ta nd a rd =
R ela y 4 C e ntralize d a la rm

T erm ination
S ta nd a rd =
R ela y 3 Ig nition / p re g low
B a sic u./Q f
low er SPEED / POW ER
D rive

(three -positio n con troller)


higher
alterna tive: S tarter
A na log con troller ou tput
53 54 23 24 41 42 14 15 4 25 26 29 30 31 32 20 21 22 11 12 13 8
u p to 8 a d d itio n a l g e n se ts
(e a c h v ia o n e AM G 3)

B a sic u nit B a sic u./Q u

low er V O L TAG E / P O W . F AC .
o nly AM G 3 S

(three -positio n con troller) S tart relay / G as valve


G

higher
alterna tive:
A na log con troller ou tput
R ead in ess for o peration
G e ne ra tor voltage L3
3

G e ne ra tor voltage L2 Inp ut 14 E

G e ne ra tor voltage L1 Inp ut 13 D

s1 (k) Inp ut 12 C
G e ne ra tor current L3
s2 (l) Inp ut 11 B

s1 (k) Inp ut 10 A
G e ne ra tor current L2
s2 (l) Inp ut 9 9

s1 (k) Inp ut 8 8
G e ne ra tor current L1
s2 (l) Inp ut 7 7

R eply: G C B is open Inp ut 6 6

Inp ut 5 5
C o m m an d: close G C B
GCB

Inp ut 4 4

Inp ut 3 3
C om m a nd: ope n G C B
Inp ut 2 or
2
D yn am o inp ut
AM G 3A Inp ut 1
L2 1
R e m a nen ce inpu t (A M G 3 A ) o r (fault class 3 : em e rge ncy S T O P )
AM G 3S B u sb ar voltag e (A M G 3 S )
L1 C o m m on
3

Isolate d op eration
(freely program -
R elay m anager

m able relays)

R ela y 2
T h is in put is alw a ys to b e set
in versely to te rm ina l 54.
M e a n in g T erm in a l 5 4 T erm in a l 5 3

Is o la te d YES NO R ela y 1
o p e ra tio n e .g . 2 4 V D C e .g . 0 V D C

M a in s p a ra lle l NO YES
o p e ra tio n e .g . 0 V D C e .g . 2 4 V D C C om m o n (term inal 3/4 /5/6/53/54)

M u lti fu nctio n te rm inal


6
50 51 52 27 28

s1 (k) M a ins cu rre nt L 1 A uto m atic 2


5

or
s2 (l) Inp ut: 0 /4..2 0 m A (o ption In20) A uto m atic 1
3

M a ins vo ltag e L3 0 V DC
2

M a ins vo ltag e L2 12 /24 V D C


1

M a ins vo ltag e L1 N
0

P rin te d 0 1 /20 01 ; s ub je c t to te c hn ica l m o cific atio ns .


A M G 3/N 1P B 2 0 0 1 -0 1 -3 0 / AM G 3 An sc h lu ß pla n g 3le o-05 01 -a p.sk f

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 142/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
6.6.3 Version N2P B

7 33 34 35 36 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 18 19 43 44 45 46 37 38 47 48 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104


X /T 4 /T z
sid e o f the unit.T his is w he re the accom pan yin g D IR E K T-
T h e socke t for th e P C pa ra m ete rization is situ ated on the

P AR A K A B E L ha s to b e plug ged in .
q u a s i-c o n tin u o u s co n tro lle r w ith a n a lo g o u tp u ts
A na log in put 4 [T4]

P T C (0 ..1 6 kO hm ), 0..180 O h m , 0..3 80 O h m


A n a lo g in puts 1 to 7 a lternative ly a s :
P t1 0 0 , P t1 000 (2- o r 3-w ire s ys tem ),

(W irin g: see O perating M a nual)


0 /4 ..2 0 m A , 0..1 0 V , 0 ..160 m V
9 10 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 120 121 122 123

A2
11 12 13
GND GND GND A na log in put 3 [T3]

A nalog output
m anager
UA GND IA
A na log ou tput
C o n tro l ro o m

0/4 ..20 m A
IA GND
SPS
PC

A na log in put 2 [T2]


IA
(op tion Tz: P t100)
9 10

GND GND

Sc
C A N -L
UA GND
C A N -H
IA
8

C A N bu s inte rface A na log in put 1 [T1]


GND
E ng ine le vel (op tion X : 0/4 ..20 m A )
G A TE W A Y

(m o d e m )
GW 4

T erm ination

B a sic u nit
GND

Sf
C A N -L P icku p

C A N -H sw itching/inductive
C A N bu s inte rface
GND
G u ida nce leve l S ta nd a rd =
R ela y 4 C e ntralize d a la rm

T erm ination
S ta nd a rd =
R ela y 3 Ig nition / p re g low
B a sic u./Q f
low er SPEED / POW ER
D rive

(three -positio n con troller)


higher
alterna tive: S tarter
A na log con troller ou tput
50 51 52 27 28 39 40 16 17 53 54 23 24 41 42 14 15 4 25 26 29 30 31 32 20 21 22 11 12 13 8
u p to 8 a d d itio n a l g e n se ts
(e a c h v ia o n e AM G 3)

B a sic u nit B a sic u./Q u

low er V O L TAG E / P O W . F AC .
o nly AM G 3 S

(three -positio n con troller) S tart relay / G as valve


G

higher
alterna tive:
A na log con troller ou tput
R ead in ess for o peration
G e ne ra tor voltage L3
3

G e ne ra tor voltage L2 Inp ut 14 E

G e ne ra tor voltage L1 Inp ut 13 D

s1 (k) Inp ut 12 C
G e ne ra tor current L3
s2 (l) Inp ut 11 B

s1 (k) Inp ut 10 A
G e ne ra tor current L2
s2 (l) Inp ut 9 9

s1 (k) Inp ut 8 8
G e ne ra tor current L1
s2 (l) Inp ut 7 7

R eply: G C B is open Inp ut 6 6

Inp ut 5 5
C o m m an d: close G C B
GCB

Inp ut 4 4

Inp ut 3 3
C om m a nd: ope n G C B
Inp ut 2 or
2
D yn am o inp ut
AM G 3A Inp ut 1
L2 1
R e m a nen ce inpu t (A M G 3 A ) o r (fault class 3 : em e rge ncy S T O P )
AM G 3S B u sb ar voltag e (A M G 3 S )
L1 C o m m on
3

R eply: M C B is open
(freely program -
R elay m anager

m able relays)

R ela y 2
R ele ase M C B
MCB

C o m m an d: close M C B R ela y 1
A M G 3/N 2P B

C om m o n (term inal 3/4 /5/6/53/54)


C o m m an d: o pen M C B
M u lti fu nctio n te rm inal
3

s1 (k) M a ins cu rre nt L 1 A uto m atic 2


5

or
s2 (l) Inp ut: 0 /4..2 0 m A (o ption In20) A uto m atic 1
3

M a ins vo ltag e L3 0 V DC
2

M a ins vo ltag e L2 12 /24 V D C


1

M a ins vo ltag e L1 N
0

P rin te d 0 1 /20 01 ; s ub je c t to te c hn ica l m o cific atio ns . 2 0 0 1 -0 1 -3 0 / AM G 3 An sc h lu ß pla n g 3le o-05 01 -a p.sk f

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 143/153
7 List of Param eters

AMG 3 - Genset Control


Version ___________________________________________________
Project ___________________________________________________
Device number _______________________________ Date _________
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard setting Customer settings
1. Line Text 2. Line level

software version - V x.xxxx - - 0


Service-Display ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 0
enter code number 0..9,999 XXXX 0
GENERATOR AND NETWORK CONFIGURATION
Configure Base? YES/NO YES †Y †N †Y †N 2
Generator-number 1..8 1 2
load conf. direct YES/NO YES †Y †N †Y †N 2
Generator freq. f set 40.0..70.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 2
Rated frequency generator 50.0/60.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 2
Gen.volt.transf. secondary 50.. 125/200..440 V 400 V 2
Gen.volt.transf. primary 0.050..65.000/ 0.400 kV 2
0.200..65.000 kV
Bus.volt.transf. secondary 50.. 125/200..440 V 400 V 2
Bus.volt.transf. primary 0.050..65.000/ 0.400 kV 2
0.200..65.000 kV
mains volt.trans secondary 50.. 125/200..440 V 400 V 2
mains volt.trans primary 0.050..65.000/ 0.400 kV 2
0.200..65.000 kV
Gen. voltage U set 25.. 140/50..500 V 100/400 V 2
Current transf. Generator 10..7,000/x A 500/x A 2
Rated current Gen. 10..7,000 A 300 A 2
Power measuring Gen. single-/three-phase threephase †e †d †e †d 2
Rated power Gen. 5..9,999/5..6,900 kW 200 kW 2
Current transf. Mains 10..7,000/x A 500/x A 2
In20 analog in Pmains 0-20/4-20 mA 4-20 mA 2
.. analog in Pmains 0% +/- 0..9.99/0..6.9 kW -200 kW 2
In20 analog in Pmains 100% +/- 0..9.99/0..6.9 kW 200 kW 2
Define level 1 code 0..9999 0001 2
Define level 2 code 0..9999 0002 2
CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
Configure Contr. YES/NO YES †Y †N †Y †N 2
Power controller P set1 F/B/L 0..3000 kW F 50 kW 1
Power controller P set2 F/B/L 0..6,900 kW F 80 kW 1
Qf Initial state Freqency 0..100 % 0% 2
Freq. controller ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
f-contr. active at: 0.0..70.0 Hz 40.0 Hz 2
Delay time for f-contr. 0..999 s 5s 2
Freq. controller ramp 1..50 Hz/s 10 Hz/s 2
Freq. controller dead band 0.02..1.00 Hz 0.03 Hz 2
Freq. controller Time pulse> 10..250 ms 80 ms 2
Freq. controller Gain Kp 0.1..99.9 20.0 2
Qf Freq. controller Gain Kpr 1..240 20 2
.. Freq. controller Reset time 0.0..60.0 s 1.0 s 2
.. Freq. controller Deriv.time 0.00..6.00 s 0.00 s 2
with SG1 Initial state f-control. 0..100 % 0% 2
.. Actuating signal Freq. min 0..100 % 0% 2
.. Actuating signal Freq. max 0..100 % 100 % 2
.. weight nominal power 0.0..100.0 % 5.0 % 2
with SG1 time constant number 1..4 2 2

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 144/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1. Line Text 2. Line level

CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
Qu Initial state Voltage 0..100 % 0% 2
Volt. controller ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
V-contr. active at: 50..400 V 100/400 V 2
Delay time for V-contr. 0..999 s 3s 2
Volt. controller dead band 0.1..15.0/0.5..60.0 V 3.5 V 2
Volt. controller Time pulse> 20.. 250 ms 80 ms 2
Volt. controller Gain Kp 0.1..99.9 20.0 2
Qu Volt. controller Gain Kpr 1..240 20.0 2
.. Volt. controller Reset time 0.0..60.0 s 1.0 s 2
Qu Volt. controller Deriv.time 0.00..6.0 s 0.0 s 2
Pow.fact. contr. ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Pow.fact. contr. Setpoint i0.70..1.00..c0.70 1.00 1
Pow.fact. contr. Dead band 0.5..25.0 % 0.5 % 2
Pow.fact. contr. Gain Kp 0.1..99.9 20.0 2
Qu Pow.fact. contr. Gain Kpr 1..240 20 2
.. Pow.fact. contr. Reset time 0.2..60.0 s 1.0 s 2
Qu Pow.fact. contr. Deriv.time 0.0..6.0 s 0.0 s 2
Power controller ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Power controller ramp 0..100 %/s 10 %/s 2
Power cotroller ramp 0..100 kW/s 10 kW/s 2
Power limit P max. 10..120 % 100 % 2
Power limit P min. 0..50 % 0% 2
x Setpoint external ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Analog input 0-20/4-20 mA 4-20 mA 2
.. ext. setpoint 0mA 0..9,999 kW F0 kW 2
x ext. setpoint 4mA 0..9,999 kW F200 kW 2
Power controller dead band 0.1..25.0 % 0.5 % 2
Power controller Gain Kp 0.1..99.9 20.0 2
P-contr. dead band ratio 1.0..9.9 2.0 2
Qf Power controller Gain Kpr 1..240 20 2
.. Power controller Reset time 0.2..60.0 s 1.0 s 2
Qf Power controller Deriv.time 0.0..6.0 s 0.0 s 2
Warm up load setpoint 5..110 % 15 % 2
Warm up load time 0..600 s 0s 2
Active power Load-share ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Loadshare factor active pow. 10..99 % 50 % 2
Reactive power Load share ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Loadshare factor react. pow. 10..99% 50 % 2
LOAD MANAGEMENT CONFIGURATION
Configure automatic YES/NO NO †Y †N †Y †N 2
Loadd.Start/Stop at ter.3 ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Loadd.Start/Stop at ter.5 ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
MOP: gen.minimum load 0..2,000 kW 15 kW 2
Add-on delay mains oper. 0..999 s 1s 2
Shed-off delay mains oper. 0..999 s 3s 2
Hysteresis add- on/off op. 0..999 kW 5 kW 2
Reserve power mains op. 0..999 kW 10 kW 2
Isolated/mains Priority 0..8 0 2
Reserve power isol .op. 0..999 kW 20 kW 2
Add-on delay isol. op. 0..999 s 1s 2
Stopdelay Isol. op. 0..999 s 4s 2

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 145/153
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1. Line Text 2. Line level

LOAD MANAGEMENT CONFIGURATION


Tz Start/Stop temp. at ter.3 ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
.. Start/Stop temp. at ter.5 ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
.. Temperature of Start 0..255 °C 30 °C 2
.. Temperature of Stop 0..255 °C 60 °C 2
Tz Start Delay time 0..255 s 1s 2
Sb/Sf serial Control comY1Y5 ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Sb/Sf serial Control comX1X5 ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER CONFIGURATION
Configure breaker? YES/NO NO †Y †N †Y †N 2
Breaker logic EXTERNAL PARALLEL † external † external 2
PARALLEL † parallel † parallel
OPEN TRANS. † open tr. † open tr.
CLOSED TRANS. † closed tr. † closed tr.
INTERCHANGE † interch. † interch.
Add-on/off ramp max.time 0..999 s 20 s 2
Open GCB with F2 max.time 0..999 s 10 s 2
GCB closing relay constant/impulse impulse †c †i †c †i 2
GCB open relay NC-contact NO-/NC-contact NO-contact † no † nc † no † nc 2
Synchr. Synchronize df max 0.02...0.49 Hz 0.20 Hz 2
.. Synchronize df min 0.0..-0.49 Hz -0.10 Hz 2
.. Synchronize dU max 1..20/2..60 V 10 V 2
.. Synchronize time pul.> 0.05..0.26 s 0.24.s 2
.. Closing time GCB 40.. 300 ms 80 ms 2
.. Closing time MCB 40.. 300 ms 80 ms 2
.. Automat. breaker deblocking ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Sync.time contr. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 1
.. Sync.time contr. Delay time 10..999 s 180 s 1
.. GCB dead bus op. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. GCB dead bus op. df max 0.00..5.00 Hz 0.45 Hz 2
.. GCB dead bus op. dU max 1..20/2..60 V 40 V 2
Synchr. MCB dead bus op. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Asyn. GCB dead bus op. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. GCB dead bus op. df max .0.05..9.99. Hz99 0.20 Hz 2
.. GCB dead bus op. df min 0.0..-9.99 Hz -0.10 Hz 2
.. Gen.breaker Time pulse> 0.05..0.26 s 240 ms 2
.. Sync.time contr. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 1
Asyn. Sync.time contr. Delay time 2..999 s 180 s 1
Supervision GCB ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Supervision MCB ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Mains decoupling via GCB/MCB GCB 2
Mains settling time 0..999 s 10 s 2
EMERGENCY POWER CONFIGURATION
Configure emerg.run YES/NO NO †Y †N †Y †N 2
Emergency power ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Emergency power start delay 0.5..99.9 s 3.0 s 2
Mains settling time 0..999 s 10 s 2

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 146/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1st Line Text 2nd Line level

CONFIGURATION OF THE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


Configure monitoring YES/NO YES †Y †N †Y †N 2
Gen.power monit. ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Power monitoring resp.value 0..150 % 120 % 2
Power monitoring gen.hyst. 0..100 % 5% 2
power monit. gen. Delay time 0..999 s 1s 2
mains power mon. ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
mains power mon. value B/L 0..9,999 kW 100 kW 2
mains power mon. hyst. 0..999 kW 10 kW 2
mains power mon. Delay time 0..999 s 1s 2
Overload monit. ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Gen.overload MOP resp.value 80..150 % 120 % 2
Synchr. Gen.overload IOP resp.value 80..150 % 120 % 2
Synchr. Gen.overload IOP delay 0..99 s 1s 2
Asyn. Gen.overload MOP delay 0..99 s 1s 2
Rev./red.power monitoring ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Rev./red.power resp.value -99..0..+99 % -10 % 2
Rev./red.power delay 0.0..9.9 s 1.0 s 2
Load unbalanced monitoring ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Load unbalanced max. 0..100 % 30 % 2
Load unbalanced delay 0.02..99.98 s 1.00 s 2
Gen.overcurrent monitoring ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Gen.overcurrent limit 1 0..300 % 110 % 2
Gen.overcurrent delay 1 0.02..99.98 s 1.00 s 2
Gen.overcurrent limit 2 0..300 % 120 % 2
Gen.overcurrent delay 2 0.02..99.98 s 0.04 s 2
Gen.frequency- Monitoring ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Gen. overfreq. f > 40.0..85.0 Hz 55.00 Hz 2
Gen. overfreq. delay 0.02..9.98 s 0.30 s 2
Gen. underfreq. f < 40.0..85.0 Hz 45.00 Hz 2
Gen. underfreq. delay 0.02..9.98 s 0.30 s 2
Motor over speed > 0..9,999 rpm 1,900 rpm 2
Gen.voltage- Monitoring ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Gen.overvoltage U > 70..130/10..520 V 440 V 2
Gen.overvoltage delay 0.02..9.98 s 0.30 s 2
Gen.undervoltage U < 70..130/10..520 V 360 V 2
Gen.undervoltage Delay time 0.2..9.98 s 0.30 s 2
Mains frequency Monitoring ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Mains overfreq. f > 40.0..70.0 Hz 50.30 Hz 2
Mains overfreq. Delay time 0.02..9.98 s 0.06 s 2
Mains underfreq. f < 40.0..70.0 Hz 49.70 Hz 2
Mains underfreq. Delay time 0.02..9.98 s 0.06 s 2
Mains voltage Monitoring ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Mains overvolt. U > 20..130/20..520 V 440 V 2
Mains overvolt. Delay time 0.02..9.98 s 0.06 s 2
Mains undervolt. U < 20..130/20..520 V 360 V 2
Mains undervolt. Delay time 0.02..9.98 s 0.06 s 2
Phase shifting Monitoring ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
Monitoring single-/only three-phase only three-phase 2
Phase shifting (One phase) 3..30 ° 9° 2
Phase shifting (3-phase) 3..30 ° 9° 2
Batt. undervolt. U < 10.0..35.0 10.0 V 2
Batt. undervolt. Delay 0..99 s 10 s 2

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 147/153
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1st line Text 2nd. line levels

CONFIGURATION OF DIGITAL INPUTS


Configure dig.inputs YES/NO NO †Y †N †Y †N 2
Dig. input 1234 function R/A AAAA †A †R †A †R 2
Dig. input 1234 Delay 0..9 0000 2
Delayed by 1234 eng.speed Y/N NNNN †Y † N †Y †N 2
Dig. input 1234 Failclass 0..3 3210 2
Dig. input 5678 function R/A AAAA †A †R †A †R 2
Dig. input 5678 Delay 0..9 0000 2
Delayed by 5678 eng.speed Y/N NNNN †Y †N †Y †N 2
Dig. input 5678 Failclass 0..3 1111 2
Dig. input 9ABC function R/A AAAA †A †R †A †R 2
Dig. input 9ABC Delay 0..9 0000 2
Delayed by 9ABC eng.speed Y/N NNNN †Y †N †Y †N 2
Dig. input 9ABC Failclass 0..3 1111 2
Dig. input DEFG function R/A AAAA †A †R †A †R 2
Dig. input DEFG Delay 0..9 0000 2
Delayed by DEFG eng.speed Y/N NNNN †Y †N †Y †N 2
Dig. input DEFG Failclass 0..3 1111 2
alarmtext ter. 61 Any Terminal 61 2
alarmtext ter. 62 Any Terminal 62 2
alarmtext ter. 63 Any Terminal 63 2
alarmtext ter. 64 Any Terminal 64 2
alarmtext ter. 65 Any Terminal 65 2
alarmtext ter. 66 Any Terminal 66 2
alarmtext ter. 67 Any Terminal 67 2
alarmtext ter. 68 Any Terminal 68 2
alarmtext ter. 69 Any Terminal 69 2
alarmtext ter. 70 Any Terminal 70 2
alarmtext ter. 71 Any Terminal 71 2
alarmtext ter. 72 Any Terminal 72 2
alarmtext ter. 73 Any Terminal 73 2
alarmtext ter. 74 Any Terminal 74 2
Function term. 6: sprinkler operation Ext. acknowledg. † sprinkl. † sprinkl. 2
engine release † eng. rel. † eng. rel.
ext.acknowledgement † ext. ackn. † ext. ackn.
engine blocking † eng. bl. † eng. bl.
Start without CB. † st. woCB † st. woCB

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 148/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1stLine text 2nd. line level

CONFIGURATION OF ANALOG INPUTS


T4 Configure analg. input YES/NO NO †Y †N †Y †N 2
T4 Temperature in: Fahrenheit/Celsius Celsius † °C † °F † °C † °F 2
T4-1 Temperature 1 Pt100/Pt1000 ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. ***name**** Any 2
.. limit warning 0..255 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..255 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit ./low limit mon. high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 1 PTC ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning value 0..100 % 0% 2
.. limit shutdown value 0..100 % 100 % 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon. high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 1 VDO Temp. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning 0..150 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..150 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit ./low limit mon. high limit mon. †h †l † pos † neg 2
.. Analog input 1 VDO Press. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. Pressure in bar bar/psi bar † bar † psi † bar † psi 2
.. analog input 1 VDO 0-5/0-10 bar 0-5 bar † 5 † 10 † 5 † 10 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..10.0 bar 2.0 bar 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..10.0 bar 1.0 bar 2
.. Analog input 1 VDO 0-73/0-145 psi 0-73 psi † 73 † 145 † 73 † 145 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..145.0 psi 8.0 psi 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..145.0 psi 9.0 psi 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon. high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog input 1 scalable ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. analog input 1 0-20mA/4-20mA 4-20 mA 2
.. value at 0 % -9,999..0..9,999 0 2
.. value at 100 % -9,999..0..9,999 100 2
.. limit warning value -9,999..0..9,999 80 2
.. limit shutdown value -9,999..0..9,999 90 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
T4-1 Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
T4-2 Temperature 2 Pt100/Pt1000 ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. ***name**** Any 2
.. limit warning 0..255 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..255 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 2 PTC ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning value 0..100 % 0% 2
.. limit shutdown value 0..100 % 100 % 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 2 VDO Temp. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning 0..150 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..150 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
T4-2 Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 149/153
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1stline text 2ndline level

CONFIGURATION OF ANALOG INPUTS


T4-2 Analog input 2 VDO Press. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. Pressure in bar bar/psi bar † bar † psi † bar † psi 2
.. analog input 2 VDO 0-5/0-10 bar 0-5 bar † 5 † 10 † 5 † 10 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..10.0 bar 2.0 bar 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..10.0 bar 1.0 bar 2
.. Analog input 2 VDO 0-73/0-145 psi 0-73 psi † 73 † 145 † 73 † 145 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..145.0 psi 8.0 psi 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..145.0 psi 9.0 psi 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog input 2 scalable ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. analog input 2 0-20mA/4-20mA 4-20 mA 2
.. value at 0 % -9,999..0..9,999 0 2
.. value at 100 % -9,999..0..9,999 100 2
.. limit warning value -9,999..0..9,999 80 2
.. limit shutdown value -9,999..0..9,999 90 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
T4-2 Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
T4-3 Temperature 3 Pt100/Pt1000 ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. ***name**** Any 2
.. limit warning 0..255 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..255 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 3 PTC ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning value 0..100 % 0% 2
.. limit shutdown value 0..100 % 100 % 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 3 VDO Temp. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning 0..150 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..150 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog input 3 VDO Press. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. Pressure in bar bar/psi bar † bar † psi † bar † psi 2
.. analog input 3 VDO 0-5/0-10 bar 0-5 bar † 5 † 10 † 5 † 10 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..10.0 bar 2.0 bar 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..10.0 bar 1.0 bar 2
.. Analog input 3 VDO 0-73/0-145 psi 0-73 psi † 73 † 145 † 73 † 145 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..145.0 psi 8.0 psi 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..145.0 psi 9.0 psi 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog input 3 scalable ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. analog input 3 0-20mA/4-20mA 4-20 mA 2
.. value at 0 % -9,999..0..9,999 0 2
.. value at 100 % -9,999..0..9,999 100 2
.. limit warning value -9,999..0..9,999 80 2
.. limit shutdown value -9,999..0..9,999 90 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
T4-3 Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 150/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1stline text 2nd Line level

CONFIGURATION OF ANALOG INPUTS


T4-4 Temperature 4 Pt100/Pt1000 ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. ***name**** Any 2
.. limit warning 0..255 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..255 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 4 PTC ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning value 0..100 % 0% 2
.. limit shutdown value 0..100 % 100 % 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog. input 4 VDO Temp. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. limit warning 0..150 °C 80 °C 2
.. limit shutdown 0..150 °C 90 °C 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog input 4 VDO Press. ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. Pressure in bar bar/psi bar † bar † psi † bar † psi 2
.. analog input 4 VDO 0-5/0-10 bar 0-5 bar † 5 † 10 † 5 † 10 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..10.0 bar 2.0 bar 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..10.0 bar 1.0 bar 2
.. Analog input 4 VDO 0-73/0-145 psi 0-73 psi † 73 † 145 † 73 † 145 2
.. Limit warning value 0.0..145.0 psi 8.0 psi 2
.. Limit shutdown value 0.0..145.0 psi 9.0 psi 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
.. Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
.. Analog input 4 scalable ON/OFF ON † on † off † on † off 2
.. Name and unit Any 2
.. analog input 4 0-20mA/4-20mA 4-20 mA 2
.. value at 0 % -9,999..0..9,999 0 2
.. value at 100 % -9,999..0..9,999 100 2
.. limit warning value -9,999..0..9,999 80 2
.. limit shutdown value -9,999..0..9,999 90 2
.. Delay limit 1/2 0..999 s 1s 2
T4-4 Monitoring for high limit /low limit mon high limit mon. †h †l †h †l 2
T4 Ana input 1234 Superv.del. Y/N YYYY 2
T4 Ana input 567 Superv.del. Y/N YYY 2

© Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0 AMG 3 Operating Instructions


g3/leo.3501.b/e Page 151/153
Parameter Code
Option Adjustment range Standard settings Customer settings
1st line text 2nd line level

CONFIGURATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS


A2 Configure outputs? YES/NO NO †Y †N †Y †N 2
.. Anal.out 120121 Parameter 0..22 1 2
.. Anal.out 120121 0-00mA 0-20mA/4-20mA 0-20 mA 2
.. Anal.out 120121 0 % 0..9,990 0 2
.. Anal.out 120121 100 % 0..9,990 200 2
.. Anal.out 122123 Parameter 0..22 1 2
.. Anal.out 122123 0-00 mA 0-20mA/4-20mA 0-20 mA 2
.. Anal.out 122123 0 % 0..9,990 0 2
A2 Anal.out 122123 100 % 0..9,990 200 2
Assignm. relay 1 According to list 1 2
Assignm. relay 2 According to list 2 2
Assignm. relay 3 According to list 82 2
Assignm. relay 4 According to list 83 2
CONFIGURATION OF THE ENGINE
Configure engine YES/NO YES †Y †N †Y †N 2
Aux. services prerun 0..999 s 0s 2
Aux. services postrun 0..999 s 0s 2
Start-Stop-Logic for DIESEL/GAS Diesel 2
min. speed for 0..999 rpm 100 rpm 2
Gas Ignition delay 1..99 s 3s 2
.. Gasvalve Delay 1..99 s 5s 2
.. Starter time 2..99 s 5s 2
.. Start pause time 1..99 s 8s 2
.. freq. low before start ON/OFF OFF †o †c †o †c 2
Gas action time for freq. low 0..999 s 5s 2
Diesel Preglow time 0..99 s 3s 2
.. Starter time 2..99 s 5s 2
.. Start pause time 1..99 s 8s 2
.. freq. low before start ON/OFF OFF †o †c †o †c 2
.. action time for freq. low 0..999 s 5s 2
Diesel Start-Stop-Logic open/close to stop close to stop †o †c †o †c 2
Cooldown time 0..999 s 30 s 2
firing speed by Term. 62 ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
Delayed engine monitoring 1..99 s 8s 2
Firing speed reached: f> 15..70 Hz 2
Pickup input ON/OFF OFF † on † off † on † off 2
nominal speed Gen. 1/min 1,000..2,000 rpm 1,500 rpm 2
Number of pickup teeth 30..280 96 2
COUNTER CONFIGURATION
Configure Counter YES/NO Yes †Y †N †Y †N 2
Service Interval in 0..99,999 h 300 h 1
Set oper.hours counter 0..65,000 h 0h 2
Start counter set 0..32,749 0 2

AMG 3 Operating Instructions © Leonhard-Reglerbau GmbH Stuttgart, (+49) 7 11/7 89 54-0


Page 152/153 g3/leo.3501.b/e
8 Index

Accuracy ............................................................... 138 Acknowledgment ..................................................42 Basic settings ....................................................... 53


Reference conditions ......................................... 138 Fault Classes ........................................................41 cos ϕ-controller..................................................... 64
Active power controller ..................................... 65, 67 Name of the error .................................................41 Definition of a setpoint value via the interface ..... 76
Active-/var sharing ............................................... 68 Freq. controller ..................................................60, 61 External setpoint value specification ..............65, 66
Part-load lead....................................................... 67 Function of terminal 6..............................................98 Freq. controller ..................................................... 60
Three-position controller ...................................... 67 Functional description .............................................15 Governor .............................................................. 58
Active-/var sharing Start-Stop-procedure ............................................22 Load sharing......................................................... 68
Controller settings ................................................ 68 Table of Setpoint Values ......................................16 Mains current, mains power ................................. 56
Add-on functions..................................................... 81 Gas unit ...........................................................24, 111 Measuring quantities ............................................ 56
Analog controller Gas valve ................................................................18 Part-load lead ....................................................... 67
Active power controller......................................... 67 Generator Frequency Monitoring ............................90 SG speed controller 1........................................... 62
cos ϕ-controller .................................................... 64 Generator number...................................................53 Transformer quantities ......................................... 56
Freq. controller..................................................... 61 Generator overload IPB ..........................................87 voltage controller .................................................. 63
voltage controller.................................................. 63 Generator overload NPB.........................................86 Parameterization mode, go to................................. 51
Analog input.......................................................... 106 Generator rated current...........................................56 Parameterization screens ....................................... 51
Analog inputs.......................................................... 10 Generator rated power ............................................56 Part-load lead.......................................................... 67
Analog output manager ................................ 108, 120 Generator setpoint frequency..................................55 Password protection ............................................... 52
Analog outputs........................................................ 12 Generator setpoint voltage......................................55 Phase shift monitoring ............................................ 94
Appendix............................................................... 120 Generator Voltage Monitoring .................................91 Pickup .............................................................11, 115
Asynchronous generator Governor Plausibility control .................................................115
Add-on functions .................................................. 81 Constant and interchange power controller..........59 Power circuit breaker configuration ........................ 76
ATS automatic transfer switching........................... 77 Freq. controller......................................................60 Power circuit breaker logic...................................... 77
Automatic 1............................................................. 16 SG speed controller 1...........................................62 Power monitoring ..............................................85, 87
Automatic 2............................................................. 16 Governor configuration............................................58 Power protection ..................................................... 86
Battery voltage monitoring...................................... 95 Ignition ON ..............................................................18 Power Supply............................................................ 6
Black start............................................................... 81 Ignition speed ........................................................114 Preheating............................................................... 18
Breaker connect time monitoring...................... 31, 82 Intended use..............................................................5 Pt100 input............................................................100
Centralized alarm ................................................... 18 Interface ..........................................................14, 124 Pt1000 input..........................................................101
Circuit Breaker Monitoring...................................... 31 3964....................................................................136 PTC input ..............................................................102
Coasting time........................................................ 112 Current direction .................................................137 Rated speed..........................................................115
Code levels............................................................. 52 Exponents...........................................................138 Rated system frequency ......................................... 55
Command Gateway GW 4 ...........................................129, 136 Readiness for operation.......................................... 18
GCB close ............................................................ 18 Power default......................................................137 Receiving telegram
GCB open ............................................................ 18 Receiving telegram.............................................128 via GW 4.............................................................136
MCB close............................................................ 19 RTS/CTS ............................................................137 via RS232/DK3964.............................................128
MCB open ............................................................ 19 Transmitting telegram.........................................124 via RS485/MOD-Bus RTU Slave .......................128
Commissioning ..................................................... 118 Introduction................................................................5 Reduced power monitoring..................................... 87
Configuration of the Counter ................................ 115 Isol. op. in parallel with sev. gensets ......................31 Reduced power protection...................................... 87
Configuration of the Digital Inputs Lamp test.................................................................46 Relay manager......................................................122
Digital Inputs ........................................................ 95 Load management configuration ............................69 Relay Manager......................................................109
Configuration of the inputs Load sharing......................................................38, 68 Release MCB.......................................................... 18
Analog inputs ....................................................... 99 Wiring diagram......................................................39 Reply
Configuration of the outputs ................................. 108 Load switch-off ..................................................85, 86 GCB is open ......................................................... 17
Configure basic settings ......................................... 53 Mains current, mains power ....................................56 MCB is open......................................................... 17
Connection via analog input.....................................................57 Reverse power monitoring...................................... 87
Current Measuring Inputs ...................................... 8 via mains power transformer ................................57 Reverse power protection....................................... 87
Power Supply......................................................... 6 Mains Frequency Monitoring...................................92 Running hour counter ........................................... 116
Voltage measuring inputs ...................................... 6 Mains parallel ..........................................................17 Running hours counter ......................................... 116
Connection diagram ............................................. 141 Mains voltage monitoring ........................................93 Safety notes .............................................................. 5
Version N1PB .................................................... 142 Maintenance call ...................................................116 Selection of the engine type ................................. 110
Version N2PB .................................................... 143 Measured quantities..............................................138 Service display........................................................ 51
Version NEB ...................................................... 141 Messages on the display.........................................19 Set kWh ................................................................ 117
Connection of the device.......................................... 6 Functional messages............................................19 SG 1 speed controller ............................................. 62
Constant and interchange power controller ........... 59 Relay messages ...................................................19 SG speed controller 1 ............................................. 62
Control inputs ......................................................... 16 Monitoring of load unbalance ..................................88 Shutdown process .................................................. 49
Control of the Power Circuit Breakers .................... 30 Monitoring of the generator performance................85 Softloading ........................................................32, 77
Control Outputs ...................................................... 18 Monitoring of the mains power ................................86 Sprinkler operation............................................17, 36
Controller Monitoring of the measuring range .......................107 Start Counter.........................................................117
Active power controller......................................... 65 Monitoring of the power...........................................86 Start of the genset.................................................117
cos ϕ-controller .................................................... 64 Monitoring Power Circuit Breakers .........................31 Start procedure
Definition of a setpoint value via the interface ..... 76 Motor blockout.........................................................17 Diesel unit............................................................. 23
External setpoint value specification.............. 65, 66 Motor release ..........................................................17 Start without CB ...................................................... 17
voltage controller.................................................. 63 No-break-transfer ..............................................32, 77 Start/stop........................................................... 69, 75
Controller output ..................................................... 13 Operating condition Isol. op. in parallel with other gensets .................. 69
cos ϕ-controller....................................................... 64 Emergency power.................................................33 Isol. op. in parallel with sev. gensets.................... 73
Three-position controller ...................................... 64 External.................................................................33 Isolated operation in parallel with other gensets.. 73
Cos ϕ-controller ...................................................... 64 Isol. op. in parallel with sev. gensets....................31 Op. in parallel with the mains of sev. gensets 69, 71
Current slave pointer ............................................ 117 No-break-transfer .................................................32 Start/stop Load-dependent ..................................... 71
Current transformer Softloading............................................................32 Start/stop Power-dependent ................................... 69
Generator ............................................................. 56 Operating conditions ...............................................26 Start/stop temperature dependent .......................... 75
Mains.................................................................... 57 GCB black start.....................................................27 Starter ..................................................................... 18
Decoupling from mains........................................... 83 GCB open .............................................................29 Starting process
Definition of a setpoint value via the interface........ 76 GCB synchronization............................................26 Gas unit ................................................................ 25
Delayed motor monitoring .................................... 113 MCB black start ....................................................28 Starting relay........................................................... 18
Diesel engine........................................................ 112 MCB open.............................................................29 Start-Stop-procedure .............................................. 22
Diesel unit......................................................... 22, 23 MCB synchronization............................................28 Diesel unit............................................................. 22
Digital Inputs....................................................... 9, 96 Sprinkler operation ...............................................36 Gas unit ................................................................ 24
Error texts ............................................................ 97 Operating magnet .................................................112 Stopping magnet................................................... 112
Dimensions........................................................... 140 Operating mode Stopping process
Direction of Power .................................................. 37 Automatic..............................................................49 Diesel unit............................................................. 23
DISPLAY................................................................. 50 Manual ..................................................................50 Gas unit ................................................................ 25
Display elements and controls ............................... 44 Stop ......................................................................49 Switch logic ............................................................. 76
Brief description ................................................... 45 Test .......................................................................49 ATS automatic transfer switching......................... 77
Buttons ................................................................. 47 Operating mode selector switch..............................49 External ....................................................33, 77, 78
DISPLAY .............................................................. 50 Options Isolated operation in parallel with other gensets.. 31
Display touch ....................................................... 47 A2 - analog outputs ............................. 12, 108, 120 Mains parallel .................................................77, 78
Light-emitting diodes............................................ 46 In20 - Measurement of mains power..............56, 57 No-break-transfer ...........................................32, 77
Operation of the Power Circuit Breakers ............. 48 O - var sharing ......................................................38 softloading ............................................................ 32
Pressure-Sensitive Front Membrane ................... 44 Qf/Qu - Analog controller output.. 13, 61, 63, 64, 67 Softloading ........................................................... 77
Display messages Sb - receiving telegram.................................76, 128 Table of Setpoint Values......................................... 16
Digital Inputs ........................................................ 20 Sf - CAN-bus........................................ 76, 129, 136 Tachogenerator.....................................................115
Fault messages.................................................... 20 Su/Sb/Sf - Interface ......................................14, 124 Technical data.......................................................139
Monitor messages................................................ 20 T4 - analog inputs ...........................................10, 99 Terminal 6 ............................................................... 98
Dynamo ................................................................ 115 Tz - temperature dependent start/stop .................75 Transmitting telegram
emergency power ................................................... 33 W - load sharing ...................................................38 directly from the AMG 2......................................124
Loss of mains....................................................... 33 X - External setpoint value) ..................................66 via GW 4.............................................................129
Emergency power configuration............................. 84 Overcurrent time protection.....................................89 UMZ ........................................................................ 89
Engine configuration............................................. 110 Overload monitoring................................................86 VDO input .............................................................103
Engine type........................................................... 110 Overload protection.................................................86 voltage controller..................................................... 63
External ...................................................... 33, 77, 78 PARALLEL ........................................................77, 78 Three-position controller ...................................... 63
External acknowledgement .................................... 17 Parameter list ........................................................144 Watchdog configuration .......................................... 85
External setpoint value specification ...................... 65 Parameterization
Faults ...................................................................... 41 Active power controller .........................................65

You might also like